CN1700329B - Reproducing device, reproducing method, reproducing program and recording medium - Google Patents
Reproducing device, reproducing method, reproducing program and recording medium Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CN1700329B CN1700329B CN2005100717231A CN200510071723A CN1700329B CN 1700329 B CN1700329 B CN 1700329B CN 2005100717231 A CN2005100717231 A CN 2005100717231A CN 200510071723 A CN200510071723 A CN 200510071723A CN 1700329 B CN1700329 B CN 1700329B
- Authority
- CN
- China
- Prior art keywords
- data
- sound
- file
- input
- time
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Expired - Lifetime
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/10—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/102—Programmed access in sequence to addressed parts of tracks of operating record carriers
- G11B27/105—Programmed access in sequence to addressed parts of tracks of operating record carriers of operating discs
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47G—HOUSEHOLD OR TABLE EQUIPMENT
- A47G9/00—Bed-covers; Counterpanes; Travelling rugs; Sleeping rugs; Sleeping bags; Pillows
- A47G9/10—Pillows
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F5/00—Orthopaedic methods or devices for non-surgical treatment of bones or joints; Nursing devices ; Anti-rape devices
- A61F5/56—Devices for preventing snoring
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/10—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/10—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/34—Indicating arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/76—Television signal recording
- H04N5/84—Television signal recording using optical recording
- H04N5/85—Television signal recording using optical recording on discs or drums
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N9/00—Details of colour television systems
- H04N9/79—Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
- H04N9/80—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
- H04N9/82—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only
- H04N9/8205—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the colour video signal
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B2220/00—Record carriers by type
- G11B2220/20—Disc-shaped record carriers
- G11B2220/25—Disc-shaped record carriers characterised in that the disc is based on a specific recording technology
- G11B2220/2537—Optical discs
- G11B2220/2541—Blu-ray discs; Blue laser DVR discs
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N9/00—Details of colour television systems
- H04N9/79—Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
- H04N9/80—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
- H04N9/804—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback involving pulse code modulation of the colour picture signal components
- H04N9/806—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback involving pulse code modulation of the colour picture signal components with processing of the sound signal
- H04N9/8063—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback involving pulse code modulation of the colour picture signal components with processing of the sound signal using time division multiplex of the PCM audio and PCM video signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N9/00—Details of colour television systems
- H04N9/79—Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
- H04N9/80—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
- H04N9/82—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only
- H04N9/8205—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the colour video signal
- H04N9/8227—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the colour video signal the additional signal being at least another television signal
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Otolaryngology (AREA)
- Pulmonology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Vascular Medicine (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Nursing (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Signal Processing For Digital Recording And Reproducing (AREA)
- Television Signal Processing For Recording (AREA)
- Indexing, Searching, Synchronizing, And The Amount Of Synchronization Travel Of Record Carriers (AREA)
Abstract
本发明公开了一种再现装置,用于再现记录在盘型记录介质上的内容数据,用于再现记录在盘型记录介质上的内容数据,该装置包括:输入装置,用于输入从记录介质再现的非实时流和实时流;存储装置,用于存储由输入装置输入的程序码;图像数据存储装置,用于存储由输入装置输入的图像数据;第一组合装置,用于组合解码后的影片数据和解码后的字幕数据;以及第二组合装置,根据存储在码存储装置中的程序码,对存储在图像数据存储装置中的解码后的图像数据以及解码后的影片和字幕数据的组合数据进行组合。
The invention discloses a reproducing device for reproducing content data recorded on a disc-shaped recording medium, for reproducing content data recorded on a disc-shaped recording medium. Reproduced non-real-time stream and real-time stream; storage means for storing the program code input by the input means; image data storage means for storing the image data input by the input means; first combining means for combining the decoded Movie data and the subtitle data after decoding; And the second combining means, according to the program code stored in the code storage device, the image data after decoding stored in the image data storage device and the combination of the movie and subtitle data after decoding data are combined.
Description
技术领域technical field
本发明涉及一种再现装置、一种再现方法、一种再现程序和一种记录介质,能够允许用户交互地操作一个记录在例如蓝光光盘等大容量记录介质中的程序。The present invention relates to a reproducing apparatus, a reproducing method, a reproducing program and a recording medium capable of allowing a user to interactively operate a program recorded in a mass recording medium such as a Blu-ray disc.
背景技术Background technique
近年来,提出了蓝光光盘(blu-ray DispC)标准,该标准用于一种可以从记录和再现装置分离的可记录盘型记录介质。蓝光光盘标准规定一种具有记录介质的光盘,其直径为12cm,表面层的厚度是0.1mm。蓝光光盘标准使用一种波长为405nm的蓝紫色激光,以及一种数值孔径为0.85的物镜。蓝光光盘标准达到的最大记录容量是27GB(千兆字节)。结果是,可以记录两小时或更长的在日本采用的广播卫星(BS)数字高清广播节目,而且没有图像质量的退化。In recent years, a blu-ray disc (blu-ray Disc) standard has been proposed for a recordable disc type recording medium that can be detached from a recording and reproducing apparatus. The Blu-ray disc standard specifies an optical disc having a recording medium having a diameter of 12 cm and a surface layer having a thickness of 0.1 mm. The Blu-ray Disc standard uses a blue-violet laser with a wavelength of 405nm and an objective lens with a numerical aperture of 0.85. The maximum recording capacity achieved by the Blu-ray Disc standard is 27 GB (gigabytes). As a result, two hours or more of broadcasting satellite (BS) digital high-definition broadcast programs adopted in Japan can be recorded without image quality degradation.
作为记录在可记录光盘中的音频/视频(AV)信号源(来源),可以采用例如传统模拟电视广播的模拟信号,以及例如BS数字广播等的数字化电视广播的数字信号。蓝光光盘标准已建立了一种用于记录上述广播的AV信号的方法。As an audio/video (AV) signal source (source) recorded in a recordable optical disc, analog signals such as conventional analog TV broadcasting, and digital signals such as digitized TV broadcasting such as BS digital broadcasting can be used. The Blu-ray Disc standard has established a method for recording the above-mentioned broadcasted AV signal.
另一方面,作为当前蓝光光盘标准的派生标准,发展了一种只再现(reproduction-only)记录介质,其中可以预先记录一段影片、音乐等。数字视频光盘(DVD)作为一种其中预先刻录影片或音乐的圆盘型记录介质,已经得到广泛使用。与蓝色光盘标准一致的只再现光盘与传统DVD有非常大的差异,并且在大记录容量和高速传输速度方面优于传统DVD,这允许以高质量记录两小时或更长的高清图像。On the other hand, as a derivative standard of the current Blu-ray Disc standard, a reproduction-only recording medium in which a piece of movie, music, etc. can be pre-recorded has been developed. A digital video disc (DVD) has been widely used as a disc-type recording medium in which movies or music are pre-recorded. Reproduction-only discs that conform to the Blu-ray Disc standard are very different from conventional DVDs, and are superior to conventional DVDs in terms of large recording capacity and high-speed transfer speed, which allow two hours or more of high-definition images to be recorded in high quality.
另一方面,目前蓝光光盘标准所规定的既不是一种用于在屏幕上显示一张光盘的视频内容列表的方法,也不是一种用户界面功能,该功能用于允许用户在列表上移动游标并且从列表中选择他或她想要再现的一个视频内容。这些功能是由一个记录和再现装置主单元实现的,该单元记录视频内容到蓝光光盘,并从蓝光光盘再现视频内容。因而,即使从相同的记录介质再现-个视频内容,内容列表屏幕的布局也取决于所使用的记录和再现装置,用户界面也是如此。因而,用户不能很方便地使用蓝光光盘。所以,有必要让只再现光盘能显示一个菜单屏幕,以及光盘(内容)制造者已设计好的其它类似的屏幕,该屏幕的显示不依赖于再现装置。On the other hand, what the current Blu-ray Disc standard specifies is neither a method for displaying a list of video content on a disc on screen, nor a user interface feature that allows the user to move a cursor on the list And selects a video content that he or she wants to reproduce from the list. These functions are realized by a recording and reproducing apparatus main unit which records video content to a Blu-ray Disc and reproduces video content from the Blu-ray Disc. Thus, even if a video content is reproduced from the same recording medium, the layout of the content list screen depends on the recording and reproduction apparatus used, as does the user interface. Therefore, the user cannot use the Blu-ray disc very conveniently. Therefore, it is necessary to allow reproduction-only optical discs to display a menu screen, and other similar screens that have been designed by the optical disc (content) manufacturer, the display of which does not depend on the reproducing apparatus.
此外,多情节功能,即当正在再现一个视频内容时显示一个选择屏幕,通常被称作交互功能。要实现上述交互功能,光盘制造者必须创建一个脚本(scenario),其中他或她指定一个再现命令以及视频内容的分支,使用程序语言、脚本语言等描述该脚本,并且将描述后的脚本记录在光盘上。再现装置端读出并执行该脚本。结果,再现装置再现一个视频内容,并且显示选择屏幕,该选择屏幕允许用户选择制造者已指定好的视频内容的分支。Also, a multi-episode function, which displays a selection screen while a video content is being reproduced, is generally called an interactive function. To realize the above-mentioned interactive function, the disc manufacturer must create a scenario (scenario), wherein he or she specifies a reproduction command and a branch of the video content, describes the scenario using a program language, script language, etc., and records the described scenario in on the disc. The playback device side reads and executes the script. As a result, the reproducing apparatus reproduces one video content, and displays a selection screen that allows the user to select a branch of the video content that the producer has specified.
因而,目前的蓝光光盘标准(蓝光光盘可擦写格式版本1.0)所规定的既不是一种组成菜单屏幕和内容制造者指定的分支选择屏幕的方法,也不是描述用户输入过程的方法。因此,到此为止,如果制造者在设计脚本时没有考虑再现装置的制造商和型号的兼容性,要根据这样的脚本从蓝光光盘中再现视频内容是很困难的。Thus, the current Blu-ray Disc standard (Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format Version 1.0) specifies neither a method of composing menu screens and branch selection screens specified by content producers, nor a method of describing user input processes. Therefore, so far, it is difficult to reproduce video content from a Blu-ray Disc according to such a script if the manufacturer does not consider the compatibility of the manufacturer and model of the reproducing device when designing the script.
对于一个已记录了影片的只再现光盘来说,显示辅助字幕的功能是必需的。然而,现有的蓝光光盘标准没有规定描述辅助字幕的功能。The function of displaying subtitles is necessary for a playback-only disc on which a movie has been recorded. However, the existing Blu-ray Disc standard does not specify the function of describing subtitles.
另一方面,上述的交互功能已在例如DVD(数字视频光盘)标准等标准中实现。例如,在DVD视频中,当正在再现一个影片时,使用一个远程控制指挥器调用菜单屏幕。例如,通过选择菜单屏幕上所显示的按键,用户可以执行一个程序,用于改变正在再现的当前场景。DVD标准还规定了显示字幕的功能。上述功能允许用户从日文字幕转换到已准备好的英文字幕,反之亦然。On the other hand, the above-mentioned interactive function has been implemented in standards such as the DVD (Digital Video Disc) standard. For example, in DVD-Video, while a movie is being reproduced, a remote control director is used to call up the menu screen. For example, by selecting a key displayed on a menu screen, the user can execute a program for changing the current scene being reproduced. The DVD standard also stipulates the function of displaying subtitles. The above features allow users to switch from Japanese subtitles to prepared English subtitles and vice versa.
关于DVD,菜单屏幕是由一固定的子画面构成。当调用菜单屏幕时,子画面以组合一段影片的方式显示。日本专利申请公开NO.平10-308924(以下称为专利文献1)描述了一个结构,用于将子画面数据和影片数据组合,并将组合后的数据记录在可记录DVD中。Regarding DVD, the menu screen is composed of a fixed sub-picture. When the menu screen is called up, the sub-pictures are displayed as a combined movie. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 10-308924 (hereinafter referred to as Patent Document 1) describes a structure for combining sprite data and movie data and recording the combined data in a recordable DVD.
接下来,将根据相关参考技术简要描述一个菜单屏幕的例子。通过再现装置,在从DVD中再现影片主要部分之前先再现菜单屏幕。通常,菜单屏幕上设置了若干按键。每个按键都指定了一个预定操作。当用户选择一个按键并使得执行所选择按键的操作时,该按键已指定的操作被执行。例如,当用户选择了按键“影片主要部分”,并使得执行所选择按键的操作时,该按键指定的操作被执行。结果,从DVD再现影片的主要部分。Next, an example of a menu screen will be briefly described based on the related reference art. By the reproducing means, the menu screen is reproduced before the main part of the movie is reproduced from the DVD. Typically, several keys are provided on the menu screen. Each key is assigned a predetermined action. When the user selects a key and causes the operation of the selected key to be performed, the operation assigned to the key is performed. For example, when the user selects the button "movie main part" and causes the operation of the selected button to be performed, the operation specified by the button is executed. As a result, the main part of the movie is reproduced from the DVD.
用户使用例如远程控制指挥器(下文中称为远程控制器)来操作已指定为上、下、左和右方向的键(方向键),以选择显示在菜单屏幕上的按键。此后,用户使用OK键执行已选择的按键的指定操作。此外,每个按键有三个状态:正常状态(未选择状态),选择状态,以及执行状态。为了让用户很容易地区别它们,它们有不同的图像和颜色。通常,只有一个按键处于选择状态或执行状态。The user operates keys (direction keys) assigned as up, down, left, and right directions using, for example, a remote control commander (hereinafter referred to as a remote controller) to select keys displayed on the menu screen. Thereafter, the user uses the OK key to perform the designated operation of the selected key. In addition, each button has three states: normal state (unselected state), selected state, and execution state. To allow users to easily distinguish them, they have different images and colors. Typically, only one key is either selected or executed.
例如,在DVD视频中,使用称为子画面和高亮的两种类型的数据来显示每个按键。图1示出了根据相关参考技术的DVD菜单屏幕300的一个例子。菜单屏幕300称为“标题菜单”。菜单屏幕300有三个按键301A、301B和301C,它们分别代表“再现电影主要部分”、“花絮画面”和“音效设定”。在图1所示的例子中,“再现影片主要部分”按键301A的外框的颜色从原始颜色发生了变化。这说明“再现影片主要部分”按键301A已处于选择状态。For example, in DVD-Video, each key is displayed using two types of data called sub-picture and highlight. FIG. 1 shows an example of a
在上述状态中,当用户操作远程控制器上的方向键时,如图2A、图2B、图2C所示,他或她可以使另一个按键处于选择状态。就像图1所示的情况,已选择按键的外框的颜色与没有被选择的按键(未选择按键)的颜色是不同的。例如,图1所示的情况中,当用户操作设置在远程控制器上的OK按键时,如图3所示,“再现影片主要部分”按键301A的颜色改变成了一个代表执行状态的颜色。此后,菜单屏幕300被清除,并且再现影片主要部分。上述的是DVD视频的按键的基本操作。In the above state, when the user operates the direction key on the remote controller, as shown in FIG. 2A , FIG. 2B , and FIG. 2C , he or she can make another key in the selected state. Just like the situation shown in FIG. 1 , the color of the frame of the selected button is different from the color of the unselected button (unselected button). For example, in the situation shown in FIG. 1, when the user operates the OK button provided on the remote controller, as shown in FIG. 3, the color of the "replay main part of the movie"
图1所示的菜单屏幕300由三种类型的数据构成,上述三种类型的数据为背景画面310、子画面311、和高亮312,分别如图4A、图4B、图4C所示。背景画面310是一个静态画面,DVD预录的内容主要部分的电影等。The
如图5所示,子画面311有一个位映象、四色信息(A0、B0、C0、D0),以及坐标(X,Y)。位映象图像是由每个像素两位信息表示的。坐标(X,Y)表示子画面311的显示开始位置。每个颜色信息A0、B0、C0和D0是由一组R(红)、G(绿)和B(蓝)数据构成的单色信息数据。每个颜色R、G和B有8位的信息。位映象图像的每个像素有两位信息。这两位中,一位是从用于每个像素的上述四色信息(A0、B0、C0、D0)中选择出的。颜色信息还有透明度数据。子画面311可以有一个区域,在该区域中背景画面310是透明的。子画面311的左上角的显示位置是由相对于背景画面310的坐标(X,Y)来表示的。As shown in FIG. 5, the sprite 311 has a bitmap, four color information (A0, B0, C0, D0), and coordinates (X, Y). Bitmap images are represented by two bits of information per pixel. The coordinates (X, Y) indicate the display start position of the sub screen 311 . Each color information A0, B0, C0, and D0 is monochrome information data constituted by a set of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) data. Each color R, G and B has 8 bits of information. Each pixel of a bitmap image has two bits of information. Of these two bits, one bit is selected from the above-mentioned four-color information (A0, B0, C0, D0) for each pixel. Color information and transparency data. The sprite 311 may have an area in which the
此外,子画面311可以有表示显示开始时间和结束时间的信息,以及引起例如淡入和淡出等视觉效果应用于子画面311上的命令。In addition, the sprite 311 may have information indicating the start time and end time of the display, as well as commands that cause visual effects such as fade-in and fade-out to be applied on the sprite 311 .
在DVD视频中,不能同时显示多个位映象图像。因而,如图1所示的其上有若干按键的菜单屏幕300是由具有如图4B所示的三个按键图像的一个大的位映象图像所显示。在图4B所示的子画面311的位映象图像中,当指定按键301A、301B和301C外部的一个区域为透明区域,并且子画面311与背景画面310组合时,在按键301A、301B和301C的显示区域外部的背景画面310变成透明。In DVD-Video, multiple bitmap images cannot be displayed simultaneously. Thus, a
高亮(highlight)312是用来将子画面311所使用的四色改变成其它四色的信息。如图5示,作为颜色信息,高亮312具有选择状态的颜色信息(A1、B1、C1、D1)和执行状态的颜色信息(A2、B2、C2、D2)。这些颜色信息是四色信息,如上述子画面311那样,每个信息由8位的RGB表示。A highlight (highlight) 312 is information for changing the four colors used by the sprite 311 to other four colors. As shown in FIG. 5 , as color information, the highlight 312 has color information (A1, B1, C1, D1) in the selected state and color information (A2, B2, C2, D2) in the execution state. These color information are four-color information, and each information is represented by 8-bit RGB like the above-mentioned sprite 311 .
高亮312有一组区域的坐标,在区域中颜色被改变。颜色改变的范围不限于全部子画面311,而是子画面311的正方形区域的一部分。子画面311中正方形区域的数量对应于用户可以选择的按键的数量,高亮312可以改变上述区域的颜色。每个正方形区域的显示位置由其左上角和右下角的坐标(X,Y)表示。例如,相应于按键301A的高亮312A的位置是由坐标(X1,Y1)和(X1′,Y1′)表示的。应用的高亮312B和312C分别相应于按键301B和301C。Highlight 312 has a set of coordinates for the area in which the color is changed. The range of color change is not limited to the entire sprite 311 but a part of the square area of the sprite 311 . The number of square areas in the sub-screen 311 corresponds to the number of keys that can be selected by the user, and the highlight 312 can change the color of the above areas. The display position of each square area is indicated by the coordinates (X, Y) of its upper left corner and lower right corner. For example, the location of highlight 312A corresponding to key 301A is represented by coordinates (X1, Y1) and (X1', Y1'). Applied highlights 312B and 312C correspond to
例如,在高亮312A中,背景图像310的由坐标(X1,Y1)和(X1′,Y1′)表示的一个区域的颜色信息(A0、B0、C0、D0)被改变成指定为选择状态颜色的颜色信息(A1、B1、C1、D1)。在这里,背景图像310的颜色信息A0改变成高亮312A的颜色信息A1。类似地,背景图像310的颜色信息B0改变成颜色信息B1。颜色信息C0改变成颜色信息C1。颜色信息D0改变成颜色信息D1。For example, in the highlight 312A, the color information (A0, B0, C0, D0) of an area represented by the coordinates (X1, Y1) and (X1', Y1') of the
接下来,将根据图1、图2A、图2B、图2C和图3所示的菜单屏幕300的按键301A的状态的改变,描述高亮312的颜色改变的一个例子。假定当按键301A在未选择状态时,按键301A的帧、前面和字体分别由颜色信息B0、颜色信息C0、颜色信息C0显示。当按键301A处于选择状态时,其帧颜色信息B0改变成对应于高亮312A的选择状态的颜色信息B1。此时,前面颜色C0和字体颜色D0没有改变。此后,当按键301A处于执行状态时,其选择状态的颜色即前面颜色C0改变成颜色信息C1。此时,选择状态颜色的帧颜色B1和字体颜色D0没有改变。Next, an example of the color change of the highlight 312 will be described according to the change of the state of the key 301A of the
当正常再现DVD视频画面时,显示对应于背景画面310的一个画面。另一方面,当再现一个具有字幕的影片时,需要再现影片主要部分背景画面310,并且需要显示字幕子画面311,将背景画面310和子画面311组合在一起并且显示。When DVD-Video frames are normally reproduced, a frame corresponding to the
然而,在DVD视频中,子画面311、表示选择状态的高亮312及表示执行状态的高亮312,它们各自最多只能使用四种颜色。因而,不能显示具有多色的子画面,是现有技术的一个难题。However, in DVD-Video, each of the sub-picture 311, the highlight 312 representing the selection state, and the highlight 312 representing the execution state can only use up to four colors. Therefore, it is a difficult problem in the prior art that sprites with multiple colors cannot be displayed.
此外,高亮312只能改变子画面311的颜色。因而,按键的字体不能在例如选择状态和执行状态中改变。此外,不能实现改变按键形状的效果。因而,现有技术不能实现丰富的用户界面。Furthermore, the highlight 312 can only change the color of the sprite 311 . Thus, the font of the key cannot be changed in, for example, the selection state and the execution state. In addition, the effect of changing the shape of the key cannot be achieved. Thus, the prior art cannot realize a rich user interface.
此外,通常使用子画面311以相同模式显示字幕和按键。因而,不能分别控制和显示字幕和按键。此外,不能完成一个组合方法,以设置和组合字幕和按键的透明度,并且显示组合后的画面。In addition, subtitles and keys are usually displayed in the same mode using the sub-picture 311 . Thus, subtitles and keys cannot be controlled and displayed separately. Also, a combined method cannot be implemented to set and combine the transparency of subtitles and buttons, and display the combined picture.
此外,在DVD视频中,当调用菜单屏幕时,停止再现在其背景中的影片数据。因而,通常即使实现了上述交互功能,实现该功能的用户界面的灵活性也很低。Also, in DVD-Video, when a menu screen is called, reproduction of movie data in its background is stopped. Therefore, usually even if the above-mentioned interactive function is realized, the flexibility of the user interface for realizing the function is very low.
在DVD视频中,在标准中没有规定用于与字幕的显示和改变同步地生成效果声音的方案。因而,不能与例如字幕等同步地生成效果声音,是现有技术的一个难题。In DVD-Video, no scheme is specified in the standard for generating effect sound in synchronization with display and change of subtitles. Therefore, it is a difficult problem in the prior art that sound effects cannot be generated synchronously with, for example, subtitles.
此外,上述标准没有规定一个为按键生成效果声音的方案,例如当用户将一个按键置于选择状态时,生成一个效果声音,或者当一个按键处于选择状态时用户操作OK键,生成一个点击声音。因而,要实现丰富的用户界面是困难的,这是现有技术的一个难题。In addition, the above-mentioned standard does not specify a scheme for generating an effect sound for a button, for example, when the user puts a button in the selected state, an effect sound is generated, or when a button is in the selected state, the user operates the OK button, and a click sound is generated. Therefore, it is difficult to realize a rich user interface, which is a difficult problem in the prior art.
上述的效果声音不是与显示在影片平面上的影片或静止画面同步地再现的声音数据(例如,与影片成对地记录的声音),而是由字幕和按键的显示控制所再现的、或是与上述显示控制同步地再现的音频数据。The above-mentioned effect sound is not sound data reproduced synchronously with a movie or a still picture displayed on a movie plane (for example, sound recorded in pairs with a movie), but is reproduced by display control of subtitles and buttons, or Audio data reproduced in synchronization with the display control described above.
发明内容Contents of the invention
因此,本发明的目标是提供一个再现装置、一个再现方法、一个再现程序和一个记录介质,其能够为大容量只再现光盘实现具有高灵活性的用户界面。Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a reproducing apparatus, a reproducing method, a reproducing program and a recording medium capable of realizing a user interface with high flexibility for a large-capacity reproduction-only optical disc.
本发明另一个目标是提供一个再现装置、一个再现方法、一个再现程序和一个记录介质,其能够为大容量只再现光盘实现丰富的用户界面。Another object of the present invention is to provide a reproducing apparatus, a reproducing method, a reproducing program and a recording medium capable of realizing a rich user interface for a large-capacity reproduction-only optical disc.
本发明的第一方面是一个再现装置,用于再现记录在盘型的记录介质中的内容数据,该装置包括输入装置,用于输入从记录介质再现的非实时流和实时流,该非实时流包括将组成一个操作屏幕以提示用户执行一个操作的图像数据和用来再现效果声音的若干段声音数据存储为至少一组程序码的文件,实时流至少包括影片数据和字幕数据;再现装置还包括存储装置,用于存储由输入装置输入的程序码;以及包括图像数据存储装置,用于存储由输入装置输入的图像数据;该装置还包括一个第一组合装置,用于组合解码后的影片数据和解码后的字幕数据,上述影片数据是由输入装置解码并输入的,上述字幕数据是由输入装置解码并输入的;该装置还包括一个第二组合装置,根据存储在码存储装置中的程序码,对存储在图像数据存储装置中的解码后的图像数据,以及解码后的影片和字幕数据的组合数据进行组合。A first aspect of the present invention is a reproduction apparatus for reproducing content data recorded in a disc-type recording medium, the apparatus comprising input means for inputting a non-real-time stream reproduced from the recording medium and a real-time stream, the non-real-time The stream includes storing image data forming an operation screen to prompt the user to perform an operation and several segments of sound data used to reproduce effect sounds as at least one set of program code files, and the real-time stream includes at least film data and subtitle data; the reproducing device also Including storage means for storing the program code input by the input means; and comprising image data storage means for storing the image data input by the input means; the device also includes a first combining means for combining the decoded film data and decoded subtitle data, the above-mentioned film data is decoded and input by the input device, and the above-mentioned subtitle data is decoded and input by the input device; The program code combines the decoded image data stored in the image data storage device, and the decoded combination data of movie and subtitle data.
本发明的第二部分是再现方法,用于再现存储在盘型记录介质中的内容数据,该方法包括步骤,输入从记录介质再现的非实时流和实时流,该非实时流包括将组成一个操作屏幕以提示用户执行一个操作的图像数据和用来再现效果声音的若干段声音数据存储为至少一组程序码的文件,实时流至少包括影片数据和字幕数据;存储在输入步骤中所输入的程序码的步骤;存储在输入步骤中所输入的图像数据的步骤;组合解码后的影片数据和解码后的字幕数据的步骤,上述影片数据是在输入步骤中解码并输入的,上述字幕数据是在输入步骤中解码并输入的;组合在第二存储步骤中存储的解码后的图像数据,以及解码后的影片和字幕数据的组合数据,上述解码后的影片和字幕数据的组合数据是在第一组合步骤中根据在第一存储步骤中存储的程序码,组合解码后的影片和字幕数据所产生的。The second part of the present invention is a reproducing method for reproducing content data stored in a disc-type recording medium, the method comprising the steps of inputting a non-real-time stream reproduced from the recording medium and a real-time stream, the non-real-time stream comprising a Operating the screen to prompt the user to perform an operation image data and several sections of sound data used to reproduce the effect sound are stored as at least one set of program code files, and the real-time stream includes at least movie data and subtitle data; the input is stored in the input step the step of program code; the step of storing the image data input in the input step; the step of combining decoded film data and decoded subtitle data, the above-mentioned film data is decoded and input in the input step, and the above-mentioned subtitle data is Decoded and input in the input step; combine the decoded image data stored in the second storing step, and the combined data of the decoded movie and subtitle data, the combined data of the decoded movie and subtitle data being in the A combining step is generated by combining the decoded film and subtitle data according to the program code stored in the first storing step.
本发明第三步骤是一个再现程序,用于使得一个计算机装置执行一个再现方法,该方法用于再现存储在盘型记录介质中的内容数据,该方法包括步骤,输入从记录介质再现的非实时流和实时流,该非实时流包括将组成一个操作屏幕以提示用户执行一个操作的图像数据和用来再现效果声音的若干段声音数据存储为至少一组程序码的文件,实时流至少包括影片数据和字幕数据;存储在输入步骤中所输入的程序码的步骤;存储在输入步骤中所输入的图像数据的步骤;组合解码后的影片数据和解码后的字幕数据的步骤,上述影片数据是在输入步骤中解码并输入的,上述字幕数据是在输入步骤中解码并输入的;组合在第二存储步骤中存储的解码后的图像数据,以及解码后的影片和字幕数据的组合数据,上述解码后的影片和字幕数据的组合数据是在第一组合步骤中根据在第一存储步骤中存储的程序码,组合解码后的影片和字幕数据所产生的。The third step of the present invention is a reproducing program for causing a computer device to execute a reproducing method for reproducing content data stored in a disc-type recording medium, the method including the step of inputting non-real-time data reproduced from the recording medium stream and real-time stream, the non-real-time stream includes storing image data constituting an operation screen to prompt the user to perform an operation and several pieces of sound data used to reproduce sound effects as at least one set of program code files, and the real-time stream includes at least a movie data and subtitle data; the step of storing the program code input in the input step; the step of storing the image data input in the input step; the step of combining decoded movie data and decoded subtitle data, the above movie data being Decoded and input in the input step, the above subtitle data is decoded and input in the input step; combining the decoded image data stored in the second storage step, and combined data of the decoded film and subtitle data, the above The combined data of the decoded movie and subtitle data is generated by combining the decoded movie and subtitle data in the first combining step according to the program code stored in the first storing step.
本发明第四方法包括一个记录介质,一个计算机装置从上述介质中能读出一个再现程序,该程序用于使得一个计算机装置执行一个再现方法,该方法用于再现存储在盘型记录介质中的内容数据,该方法包括步骤,输入从记录介质再现的非实时流和实时流,该非实时流包括将组成一个操作屏幕以提示用户执行一个操作的图像数据和用来再现效果声音的若干段声音数据存储为至少一组程序码的文件,实时流至少包括影片数据和字幕数据;存储在输入步骤中所输入的程序码的步骤;存储在输入步骤中所输入的图像数据的步骤;组合解码后的影片数据和解码后的字幕数据的步骤,上述影片数据是在输入步骤中解码并输入的,上述字幕数据是在输入步骤中解码并输入的;组合在第二存储步骤中存储的解码后的图像数据,以及解码后的影片和字幕数据的组合数据,上述解码后的影片和字幕数据的组合数据是在第一组合步骤中根据在第一存储步骤中存储的程序码,组合解码后的影片和字幕数据所产生的。The fourth method of the present invention includes a recording medium from which a computer device can read a reproducing program for causing a computer device to execute a reproducing method for reproducing data stored in a disk-type recording medium. For content data, the method includes the step of inputting a non-real-time stream reproduced from a recording medium and a real-time stream including image data to compose an operation screen to prompt a user to perform an operation and pieces of sound for reproducing an effect sound The data is stored as a file of at least one group of program codes, and the real-time stream includes at least movie data and subtitle data; the step of storing the program code input in the input step; the step of storing the image data input in the input step; after combining the decoding The steps of the movie data and the decoded subtitle data, the above-mentioned movie data are decoded and input in the input step, and the above-mentioned subtitle data are decoded and input in the input step; combining the decoded stored in the second storage step Image data, and combined data of the movie after decoding and subtitle data, the combined data of the movie after the above-mentioned decoding and subtitle data is according to the program code stored in the first storage step in the first combination step, the movie after combination decoding and subtitle data are generated.
本发明第五方面是一个盘型记录介质,其中记录了内容数据,非实时流至少包括程序码、组成一个操作屏幕以提示用户执行一个操作的图像数据,实时流至少包括影片数据和字幕数据,一个存储为一组多段声音数据的文件,用来记录效果声音,存储的解码后的图像数据,以及解码后的影片和字幕数据的组合数据,其是根据程序码而组合的。The fifth aspect of the present invention is a disk-type recording medium, wherein content data is recorded, the non-real-time stream includes at least program code, image data forming an operation screen to prompt the user to perform an operation, and the real-time stream includes at least film data and subtitle data, A file stored as a set of multi-segment sound data for recording effect sound, stored decoded image data, and combined data of decoded movie and subtitle data, which are combined according to the program code.
本发明的第六方面是一个记录装置,用于记录在一个盘型记录介质上的内容数据,该装置包括:记录装置,用于记录非实时流和实时流,该非实时流包括将组成一个操作屏幕以提示用户执行一个操作的图像数据和用来再现效果声音的若干段声音数据存储为至少一组程序码的文件,实时流至少包括影片数据和字幕数据;其中程序码要执行对解码后图像数据和一个组合数据的组合操作。该解码后的图像数据是将记录装置所记录的图像数据解码而得到的,该组合数据包括实时流的解码影片数据和实时流的字幕数据的解码字幕数据。A sixth aspect of the present invention is a recording apparatus for recording content data on a disc-type recording medium, the apparatus comprising: recording apparatus for recording non-real-time streams and real-time streams, the non-real-time streams comprising a The image data for operating the screen to prompt the user to perform an operation and several pieces of sound data for reproducing the effect sound are stored as at least one set of program code files, and the real-time stream includes at least movie data and subtitle data; wherein the program code needs to be executed after decoding A combined operation of image data and a combined data. The decoded image data is obtained by decoding the image data recorded by the recording device, and the combined data includes decoded video data of the real-time stream and decoded subtitle data of the subtitle data of the real-time stream.
如上所述,根据本发明的第一到第四方面,输入从记录介质再现的非实时流和实时流。该非实时流包括该非实时流包括将组成一个操作屏幕以提示用户执行一个操作的图像数据和用来再现效果声音的若干段声音数据存储为至少一组程序码的文件。实时流至少包括影片数据和字幕数据。程序码存储在码存储装置中。图像数据存储在图像数据存储装置中。对输入的影片数据解码后得到解码影片数据,以及对输入的字幕数据解码后得到解码字幕数据,将解码影片数据和解码字幕数据组合,得到组合数据。将上述存储在图像数据存储装置中的解码图像数据和组合数据根据存储在码存储装置中的程序码组合,上述组合数据是解码影片和解码字幕数据的组合。因而,当再现内容数据时,可以在不同时间很容易地显示使用了相同图像数据的操作屏幕。此外,可以再现提示用户在操作屏上操作的效果声音。As described above, according to the first to fourth aspects of the present invention, a non-real-time stream and a real-time stream reproduced from a recording medium are input. The non-real-time stream includes a file storing image data constituting an operation screen to prompt a user to perform an operation and pieces of sound data for reproducing effect sounds as at least one set of program codes. A real-time stream includes at least movie data and subtitle data. Program codes are stored in code storage means. Image data is stored in an image data storage device. The input video data is decoded to obtain decoded video data, and the input subtitle data is decoded to obtain decoded subtitle data, and the decoded video data and decoded subtitle data are combined to obtain combined data. Combining the above-mentioned decoded image data and combination data stored in the image data storage device according to the program code stored in the code storage device, the above-mentioned combination data is a combination of decoded movie and decoded subtitle data. Thus, when content data is reproduced, operation screens using the same image data can be easily displayed at different times. In addition, an effect sound prompting the user to operate on the operation screen can be reproduced.
根据本发明的第五方面,记录了:非实时流,包括至少一组程序码;组成一个操作屏幕以提示用户执行一个操作的图像数据;实时流至少包括影片数据和字幕数据;一个文件,存储一系列多段声音数据,用于记录效果声音。根据程序码组合已存储的图像数据和组合数据,上述组合数据是解码影片和解码字幕数据的组合。因而,当再现内容数据时,可以在不同时间很容易地显示使用了相同图像数据的操作屏幕。此外,可以再现提示用户在操作屏上操作的效果声音。According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, it is recorded: a non-real-time stream, including at least one set of program codes; image data forming an operation screen to prompt the user to perform an operation; the real-time stream includes at least movie data and subtitle data; a file, storing A series of multi-segment sound data for recording effect sounds. Combining the stored image data and combination data according to the program code, the above combination data is a combination of decoded movie and decoded subtitle data. Thus, when content data is reproduced, operation screens using the same image data can be easily displayed at different times. In addition, an effect sound prompting the user to operate on the operation screen can be reproduced.
根据本发明的第六方面,在记录介质中记录了非实时流,包括至少一组程序码的文件;组成一个操作屏幕以提示用户执行一个操作的图像数据;实时流,至少包括影片数据和字幕数据;一个文件,存储一系列多段声音数据,用于记录效果声音。根据存储在记录介质中的程序码,组合已存储的解码后的图像数据和组合数据,上述组合数据是解码影片和解码字幕数据的组合。因而,当再现内容数据时,可以在不同时间很容易地显示使用了相同图像数据的操作屏幕。此外,可以再现提示用户在操作屏上操作的效果声音。According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, a non-real-time stream is recorded in the recording medium, including at least one set of program code files; image data forming an operation screen to prompt the user to perform an operation; real-time stream, including at least film data and subtitles Data; a file that stores a series of multi-segment sound data for recording effect sounds. Based on the program code stored in the recording medium, the stored decoded image data is combined with combination data which is a combination of decoded movie and decoded subtitle data. Thus, when content data is reproduced, operation screens using the same image data can be easily displayed at different times. In addition, an effect sound prompting the user to operate on the operation screen can be reproduced.
如上所述,根据本发明的预录大容量光盘具有三个独立平面,它们是:用于影片的影片平面,用于字幕的字幕平面,以及图形平面,用于具有例如菜单屏幕的交互功能的屏幕。这些平面相互组合并显示。因而,作为本发明的一个效果,可以在影片平面上显示影片,同时菜单屏幕等伴随影片的背景显示在图形平面上。As described above, the pre-recorded large-capacity optical disc according to the present invention has three independent planes, which are: a film plane for movies, a subtitle plane for subtitles, and a graphics plane for interactive functions such as menu screens. Screen. These planes are combined and displayed with each other. Thus, as an effect of the present invention, a movie can be displayed on the movie plane while a background such as a menu screen accompanying the movie is displayed on the graphics plane.
此外,根据发明,由于配置了一个缓冲器,用于存储要显示在图形平面上的图像数据,可以在图形平面上重复地显示相同的图像数据。因而,作为本发明的一个效果,可以构成具有比以往更高的灵活性的菜单屏幕等。Furthermore, according to the invention, since a buffer is arranged for storing image data to be displayed on the graphics plane, the same image data can be repeatedly displayed on the graphics plane. Therefore, as an effect of the present invention, it is possible to configure a menu screen or the like having higher flexibility than before.
此外,根据本发明,使用显示控制命令描述了用于显示在图形平面上的图形的显示控制。因而,作为本发明的一个效果,显示在图形平面上的屏幕实现了交互功能。Furthermore, according to the present invention, display control for graphics displayed on a graphics plane is described using a display control command. Thus, as an effect of the present invention, the screen displayed on the graphics plane realizes the interactive function.
此外,根据本发明的预录大容量光盘具有三个独立的平面,它们是:用于影片的影片平面,用于字幕的字幕平面,以及图形平面,用于具有例如菜单屏幕的交互功能的一个屏幕。这些平面相互组合并显示。作为一个对象格式的公用图形对象显示在字幕平面上,并且形成图形平面。确定解码模型、显示控制命令和操作模型。因此,作为本发明的一个效果,字幕和按键可以与影片同步显示。In addition, the pre-recorded large-capacity optical disc according to the present invention has three independent planes, which are: a film plane for movies, a subtitle plane for subtitles, and a graphics plane for an interactive function such as a menu screen. Screen. These planes are combined and displayed with each other. A common graphics object, which is an object format, is displayed on the subtitle plane, and forms the graphics plane. Determine the decoding model, display control commands, and operation model. Therefore, as an effect of the present invention, subtitles and buttons can be displayed synchronously with the movie.
此外,实现了简单的动画,它滚动并且移动字幕和按键,图像的内容可以根据用户的输入而改变,从而美化了按键。In addition, a simple animation is implemented, which scrolls and moves the subtitles and buttons, and the content of the image can change according to the user's input, thereby beautifying the buttons.
此外,根据本发明,确定一个解码模型,其中声音数据包括在图形对象中,而且当显示包括在图形对象中的按键图像时,再现声音数据。因而,可以很容易地与显示的图形对象同步地再现声音数据。Furthermore, according to the present invention, a decoding model is determined in which sound data is included in the graphic object, and the sound data is reproduced when the button image included in the graphic object is displayed. Thus, sound data can be easily reproduced in synchronization with displayed graphic objects.
此外,根据本发明,相对于用于图形对象的显示控制命令,确定使得再现声音数据的命令。此外,可以相对于对象的显示控制命令,将声音数据指定给包括在图形对象中的图像数据。因而,作为本发明的一个效果,可以在任何时间再现作为效果声音的声音数据,而且字幕和按键也都具有效果声音。Furthermore, according to the present invention, a command causing sound data to be reproduced is determined with respect to a display control command for a graphic object. Furthermore, sound data may be assigned to image data included in a graphic object with respect to a display control command of the object. Thus, as an effect of the present invention, sound data as effect sounds can be reproduced at any time, and subtitles and keys also have effect sounds.
此外,根据本发明,提供了一个方案,用于当用户选择了由图形用户界面(GUI)显示的菜单屏幕上的一个按键时,或者他或她在选择一个按键后操作OK按键时,生成效果声音,例如一个点击声音。因而,在一个再现装置、一个再现方法、一个再现程序、一个记录介质中,允许用户交互地操作一个预录在例如光盘的大容量记录介质上的程序,实现了一个丰富的用户界面,参照附图对根据下面的最佳实施例的详细描述,本发明的上述对象、特征和优点将会更加明显。Furthermore, according to the present invention, there is provided a scheme for generating an effect when a user selects a key on a menu screen displayed by a graphical user interface (GUI), or when he or she operates the OK key after selecting a key Sound, such as a click sound. Thus, in a reproducing apparatus, a reproducing method, a reproducing program, and a recording medium, a user is allowed to interactively operate a program pre-recorded on a large-capacity recording medium such as an optical disc, and a rich user interface is realized. Refer to the appended The above-mentioned objects, features and advantages of the present invention will be more apparent from the detailed description of the preferred embodiments below.
附图说明Description of drawings
从下面结合附图的详细描述中,将会更充分地理解本发明。附图中相同的附图标记表示相同的部分。其中:The present invention will be more fully understood from the following detailed description taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. The same reference numerals denote the same parts in the drawings. in:
图1示出了根据现有技术的DVD菜单屏幕的一个例子的示意图;FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a DVD menu screen according to the prior art;
图2A、图2B和图2C示出了通过远程控制器的操作改变选择状态的按键的示意图;Fig. 2A, Fig. 2B and Fig. 2C show the schematic diagram of the button that changes the selection state through the operation of the remote controller;
图3示出了一个按键的颜色改变成另一个颜色的示意图,表示操作OK键的执行状态;Fig. 3 shows a schematic diagram of changing the color of a key to another color, indicating the execution state of the OK key;
图4A、4B和4C示出了根据相关技术的菜单屏幕的结构的一个例子的示意图;4A, 4B and 4C are diagrams showing an example of the structure of a menu screen according to the related art;
图5示出了根据相关技术的子画面的数据结构的例子示意图;Fig. 5 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a data structure of a sub-picture according to the related art;
图6示出了用于指定AV流文件的再现顺序的方案的示意图;FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of a scheme for specifying the reproduction sequence of an AV stream file;
图7示出了片断AV流、片断信息、片断、播放项目和播放列表的关系的UML示意图;Fig. 7 shows the UML diagram of the relation of clip AV stream, clip information, clip, play item and play list;
图8是描述了用于从若干播放列表中访问相同片断的方法的示意图;Figure 8 is a schematic diagram describing a method for accessing the same segment from several playlists;
图9是描述了记录在一个记录介质上的文件的管理结构的示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram describing a management structure of files recorded on a recording medium;
图10示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了文件“info.badv”的结构的例子;Fig. 10 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of the file "info.badv";
图11示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个块UIAppInfoBDAV()的结构的例子;FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a block UIAppInfoBDAV();
图12示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个块TableOfPlayLists()的结构的例子;Fig. 12 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a block TableOfPlayLists();
图13示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”的结构的例子;Fig. 13 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of files "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls";
图14示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个块UIAppInfoPlayList()的结构的例子;FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a block UIAppInfoPlayList();
图15示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个块PlayList()的结构的例子;Fig. 15 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a block PlayList();
图16示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个块PlayItem()的结构的一个例子;Fig. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a block PlayItem();
图17是描述了一个桥接片断的示意图;Figure 17 is a schematic diagram depicting a bridging segment;
图18示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个块PlayListMark()的结构的例子;Fig. 18 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a block PlayListMark ();
图19示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个文件“%%%%%.clpi”的结构的例子;Fig. 19 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a file "%%%%%.clpi";
图20示出了用作根据本发明的一个实施例的画面的显示系统的一个平面的例子的示意图;FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a plane used as a display system of a screen according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图21示出了影片平面、字幕平面和图形平面的分辨率和可显示色的例子的示意图;Fig. 21 shows a schematic diagram of examples of resolutions and displayable colors of a film plane, a subtitle plane and a graphics plane;
图22示出了一个结构的例子的示意图,它将影片平面、字幕平面和图形平面组合;Fig. 22 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a structure which combines a movie plane, a subtitle plane and a graphics plane;
图23是一个调色板的输入和输出数据的例子的示意图;Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of an example of input and output data of a palette;
图24示出了调色板中的调色板表格的例子的示意图;Figure 24 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a palette table in a palette;
图25示出了显示在图形平面的菜单屏幕的例子的示意图;FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a menu screen displayed on a graphics plane;
图26是示出一个脚本的内部结构的例子的示意图;Fig. 26 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the internal structure of a script;
图27是描述了一个BD虚拟播放器模式的示意图;Fig. 27 is a schematic diagram describing a BD virtual player mode;
图28示出了为BD虚拟播放器特别确定的事件的例子的示意图;FIG. 28 shows a schematic diagram of an example of an event specifically determined for a BD virtual player;
图29A和图29B示出了根据本发明实施例为BD虚拟播放器确定的方法的例子的示意图;29A and 29B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a method determined for a BD virtual player according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图30A、图30B、图30C和图30D示出了根据本发明实施例为BD虚拟播放器确定的方法的例子的示意图;Fig. 30A, Fig. 30B, Fig. 30C and Fig. 30D are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of a method determined for a BD virtual player according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图31A、图31B、图31C和图31D示出了根据本发明实施例为BD虚拟播放器确定的方法的例子的示意图;Fig. 31A, Fig. 31B, Fig. 31C and Fig. 31D are schematic diagrams showing an example of a method determined for a BD virtual player according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图32示出了记录在光盘上的一个脚本的结构的例子的示意图;Fig. 32 shows the schematic diagram of the example of the structure of a script recorded on the disc;
图33示出了用于构造一个脚本所必需的文件列表的示意图;Fig. 33 shows the schematic diagram that is used to construct the necessary file list of a script;
图34示出了光盘中记录有一个脚本时,目录结构的例子的示意意图;Figure 34 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a directory structure when a script is recorded in the optical disc;
图35示出了脚本文件的描述的更实用的例子的示意图;Fig. 35 shows a schematic diagram of a more practical example of description of a script file;
图36示出了脚本文件的描述的更实用的例子的示意图;Fig. 36 shows a schematic diagram of a more practical example of description of a script file;
图37是HTML文件的描述的更实用的例子的示意图;Fig. 37 is a schematic diagram of a more practical example of description of an HTML document;
图38示出了脚本文件的描述的更实用的例子的示意图;Fig. 38 shows a schematic diagram of a more practical example of description of a script file;
图39A和图39B示出了播放器解码器结构的一个例子的功能框图;Fig. 39A and Fig. 39B have shown the functional block diagram of an example of player decoder structure;
图40示出了所显示的按键的状态改变的例子的示意图;Fig. 40 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a state change of a displayed key;
图41是描述了对象类型的类别的示意图;Fig. 41 is a schematic diagram describing categories of object types;
图42A、图42B和图42C示出了根据本发明实施例的图象对象的数据结构的例子的示意图;Fig. 42A, Fig. 42B and Fig. 42C show the schematic diagram of the example of the data structure of the image object according to the embodiment of the present invention;
图43示出了分割图形对象并保存在PES包中的状态的示意图;Fig. 43 shows a schematic diagram of a state in which a graphic object is divided and stored in a PES packet;
图44示出了解码图形对象的图形对象解码器模型的结构的例子的功能框图;Fig. 44 shows the functional block diagram of the example of the structure of the graphic object decoder model of decoding graphic object;
图45A、图45B、图45C和图45D示出了在图形对象输入缓冲器、PNG解码器、对象缓冲器和平面缓冲器中改变的已存储数据数量的例子的示意图;Fig. 45A, Fig. 45B, Fig. 45C and Fig. 45D show the schematic diagram of the example of the stored data quantity that changes in graphic object input buffer, PNG decoder, object buffer and plane buffer;
图46是描述平面刷新速度的示意图;Fig. 46 is a schematic diagram describing plane refresh rate;
图47示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个图形对象结构的例子;Figure 47 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of a graphics object structure;
图48示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个块GlobalPaletteTable()的结构的例子;Figure 48 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a block GlobalPaletteTable();
图49A和图49B示出了命令组DispCmds(i)的显示控制命令列表的例子的示意图;49A and 49B are diagrams showing an example of a display control command list of the command group DispCmds(i);
图50A和图50B是描述了命令set_display_box(x1,y1,x2,y2)和命令set_clipping_box(a1,b1,a2,b2)的示意图;50A and 50B are diagrams describing the command set_display_box (x1, y1, x2, y2) and the command set_clipping_box (a1, b1, a2, b2);
图51是描述了坐标轴的确定的示意图;Fig. 51 is a schematic diagram describing determination of coordinate axes;
图52是描述了命令组DispCmds(i)和显示的图形对象的改变的例子的示意图;Fig. 52 is a schematic diagram describing an example of a change of a command group DispCmds(i) and a displayed graphic object;
图53A、图53B、图53C和图53D示出了字幕逐渐地显示淡入的例子的示意图;FIG. 53A, FIG. 53B, FIG. 53C and FIG. 53D show schematic diagrams of examples in which subtitles are gradually displayed and faded in;
图54A和图54B示出了作为字幕的PNG图像在平面上移动的例子的示意图;FIG. 54A and FIG. 54B are schematic diagrams showing an example in which a PNG image as a subtitle moves on a plane;
图55A和图55B示出了显示的字幕滚动的例子的示意图;55A and 55B are schematic diagrams showing examples of displayed subtitle scrolling;
图56A和图56B示出了表示PNG图像一部分的帧被指定、帧在PNG图像上移动并且其位置在平面上移动的示意图;56A and FIG. 56B show schematic diagrams in which a frame representing a part of a PNG image is designated, the frame moves on the PNG image, and its position moves on a plane;
图57是描述了命令组IispCmds(i)的示意图,一个命令play_sound(sound_id)添加到上述命令组,这示出了改变显示的图形对象的例子;Fig. 57 is a schematic diagram describing the command group IispCmds(i), a command play_sound(sound_id) is added to the above command group, which shows an example of changing the displayed graphic object;
图58示出了图形对象的数据结构的例子的示意图,其中声音数据已经被指定到按键图像;Fig. 58 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a data structure of a graphic object in which sound data has been assigned to a button image;
图59A、图59B、图59C示出了在图形对象中放置声音数据的方法的例子的示意图;Fig. 59A, Fig. 59B, Fig. 59C are schematic diagrams showing an example of a method for placing sound data in a graphic object;
图60示出了已添加了一个声音数据处理系统的图形对象解码模型的例子的功能框图;Figure 60 shows a functional block diagram of an example of a graphics object decoding model to which a sound data processing system has been added;
图61示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了已添加了声音数据的图形对象结构的例子;Fig. 61 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of a graphic object structure to which sound data has been added;
图62示出了声音数据没有位于图形对象中时数据管理结构的例子的示意图;Fig. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the data management structure when sound data is not located in a graphic object;
图63示出了声音数据没有位于图形对象中描述声音数据的再现的更实用的示意图;Fig. 63 shows a more practical schematic diagram for describing the reproduction of sound data without sound data located in a graphic object;
图64是描述了记录在记录介质上的文件的管理结构的示意图;FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram describing a management structure of files recorded on a recording medium;
图65示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”的例子;Fig. 65 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the file "HdmvSound.bdmv";
图66示出了文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”的结构的示意图;Fig. 66 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of the file "HdmvSound.bdmv";
图67示出了根据第三存储方法再现效果声音的应用程序的图像的例子的示意图;FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of an image of an application for reproducing sound effects according to a third storage method;
图68A和图68B示出了交互图形流的结构的例子的示意图;68A and 68B are schematic diagrams showing an example of the structure of an interactive graphics stream;
图69示出了交互组成片段的结构的示意图;Fig. 69 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of interactive composition fragments;
图70是描述了交互组成片段的一个域neibour_info的示意图;Fig. 70 is a schematic diagram describing a field neibour_info of an interaction composition segment;
图71示出了根据本发明实施例的用作画面显示系统的平面结构的另一个例子的示意图;FIG. 71 shows a schematic diagram of another example of a planar structure used as a screen display system according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图72示出了影片平面、字幕平面、图形平面的分辨率和可显示色的另一个例子的示意图;Fig. 72 shows a schematic diagram of another example of the resolution and displayable colors of the movie plane, the subtitle plane, and the graphics plane;
图73示出了根据另一个例子的一个结构的方块图,该结构组合了影片平面、字幕平面和图形平面;Fig. 73 shows a block diagram of a structure according to another example, which structure combines a film plane, a subtitle plane and a graphics plane;
图74A和图74B示出了播放器解码器的结构的例子的功能框图;Figure 74A and Figure 74B show the functional block diagram of the example of the structure of player decoder;
图75A和图75B示出了播放器解码器结构的另一个例子的功能框图;Fig. 75 A and Fig. 75 B have shown the functional block diagram of another example of player decoder structure;
图76是描述了声音数据文件定位到子播放项目的示意图;Fig. 76 is a schematic diagram describing the positioning of sound data files to subplayitems;
图77是描述用于记录在记录介质上的文件的管理结构的示意图;Fig. 77 is a schematic diagram describing a management structure for files recorded on a recording medium;
图78示出了根据本发明第二模式的一个脚本的内部结构的例子的示意图,该脚本使用了最初确定的脚本描述语言;Fig. 78 shows a schematic diagram of an example of the internal structure of a script according to the second mode of the present invention, the script uses the initially determined script description language;
图79是描述了脚本结构的目录的示意图;Figure 79 is a schematic diagram of a directory describing a script structure;
图80A、图80B和图80C是描述了脚本结构的目录的示意图;Figure 80A, Figure 80B and Figure 80C are the schematic diagrams that have described the directory of script structure;
图81是描述了标题和段的示意图;Fig. 81 is a schematic diagram describing headers and sections;
图82A和图82B示出了根据本发明第二模式的对应于一个脚本中所描述的命令的BD虚拟播放器的大概操作的流程图;82A and 82B are flow charts showing an approximate operation of a BD virtual player corresponding to a command described in a script according to the second mode of the present invention;
图83A和图83B是描述了根据播放列表的再现操作的流程图;83A and 83B are flowcharts describing a reproduction operation according to a PlayList;
图84A和图84B示出了脚本的分级结构的例子的示意图;84A and 84B are diagrams showing examples of hierarchical structures of scripts;
图85是描述了记录在记录介质中的文件的管理结构的示意图;FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram describing a management structure of files recorded in a recording medium;
图86示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个脚本的脚本文件(scenario.pbc)的结构的例子;Fig. 86 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a script file (scenario.pbc) of a script;
图87示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个块GlobalCommand()的结构的例子;Figure 87 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a block GlobalCommand();
图88示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个块TitleEntry()的数据结构的例子;Figure 88 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the data structure of a block TitleEntry();
图89示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了块scenario()的结构的例子;Figure 89 shows a schematic diagram of a syntax describing an example of the structure of a block scenario();
图90示出了根据本发明第二模式在一个脚本中使用的命令的例子的示意图。Fig. 90 is a diagram showing an example of commands used in a script according to the second mode of the present invention.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
接下来,将以下列顺序描述本发明。Next, the present invention will be described in the following order.
1.BDAV格式大纲1. Outline in BDAV format
2.本发明的第一模式2. The first mode of the present invention
2-1.关于平面2-1. About plane
2-2.菜单屏幕2-2. Menu screen
2-3.关于脚本2-3. About the script
2-4.关于虚拟播放器模型2-4. About the virtual player model
2-5.关于方法2-5. About the method
2-6.关于命令的执行2-6. Execution of commands
2-7.解码器模型2-7. Decoder model
2-8.用户界面2-8. User interface
2-9.关于数据结构2-9. About data structure
2-10.关于图形对象的解码器模型2-10. Decoder model for graphics objects
2-11.关于图形的传送速度2-11. Regarding the transmission speed of graphics
2-12.图形对象结构的细节2-12. Details of Graphics Object Structure
2-13.关于效果声音2-13. About the effect sound
2-14.关于用于在光盘上存储声音数据的方法2-14. About method for storing audio data on optical disc
2-14a.第一存储方法2-14a. First storage method
2-14b.第二存储方法2-14b. Second storage method
2-14c.第三存储方法2-14c. The third storage method
2-15.平面的另一个例子2-15. Another example of plane
2-16.解码器模型的另一个例子2-16. Another example of decoder model
2-17.解码器模型的另一个例子2-17. Another example of decoder model
3.本发明的第二模式3. The second mode of the present invention
3-1.关于脚本3-1. About the script
3-2.脚本的目录3-2. Script directory
3-3.关于虚拟播放器模型3-3. About the virtual player model
3-4.关于语法3-4. About grammar
3-5.关于命令3-5. About commands
4.其它4. Other
1.BDAV格式大纲1. Outline in BDAV format
首先,为了容易地理解本发明,将描述一个在“蓝光光盘可擦写格式版本1.0第三部分音频视觉说明书”中规定管理结构,用于预录在蓝光光盘上名为AV(音频/视频)数据的内容。在下面的描述中,将该管理结构称为BDAV格式。First, in order to easily understand the present invention, a management structure specified in "Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format Version 1.0
将一个已根据例如MPEG(运动图象专家组)视频或MPEG音频等编码系统编码、并且根据MPEG-2系统多路转换的位流称为片断(clip)AV流(或简单AV流)。通过在用于蓝光光盘的“蓝光光盘可擦写格式版本1.0第二部分”中所确定的文件系统,将片断AV流作为一个文件记录在光盘中。该文件称为片断AV流文件(或简单AV流)。A bit stream that has been encoded according to a coding system such as MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) video or MPEG audio, and multiplexed according to the MPEG-2 system is called a clip AV stream (or simply AV stream). The clip AV stream is recorded in the disc as one file by the file system specified in "Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format Version 1.0
片断AV流文件是文件系统中的管理单元。因而,不能说用户可以很容易就能理解片断AV流文件是文件系统中的管理单元。从用户方便的观点看来,必须记录一个必要的方案,用以组合分割成若干片断AV流文件的视频内容,并且再现组合得到的视频内容;还要记录一个必要的方案,以再现片断AV流文件的仅仅一部分;还要记录一个必要的信息,以顺利地完成一个特定再现和搜索再现等等,作为数据库。“蓝光光盘可擦写格式版本1.0第三部分”作为用于蓝光光盘的标准,规定了这样一个数据库。A clip AV stream file is a management unit in the file system. Therefore, it cannot be said that the user can easily understand that the clip AV stream file is a management unit in the file system. From the viewpoint of user convenience, it is necessary to record a necessary scheme for combining the video content divided into several fragment AV stream files and reproduce the combined video content; and also record a necessary scheme for reproducing the fragment AV stream Only a part of the file; also record a necessary information to smoothly perform a specific reproduction and search reproduction, etc., as a database. "Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format Version 1.0
图6示出了一个方案,用于指定AV流文件中的一部分,只处理其需要的部分,并再现处理后的部分。在图6中,一个播放列表(PlayList)使得AV流文件的一部分或全部被指定,并且只再现其中需要的部分。当用户需要再现一个内容时,他或她在播放列表的单元里选择这个内容。播放列表是一个视频/音频单元,用户默认期望在其中一个内容会连续地再现。FIG. 6 shows a scheme for specifying a part of an AV stream file, processing only the necessary part thereof, and reproducing the processed part. In FIG. 6, a playlist (PlayList) allows a part or all of the AV stream file to be specified, and only a necessary part thereof is reproduced. When the user needs to reproduce a content, he or she selects the content in the unit of the play list. A playlist is a video/audio unit in which the user defaults to expect a piece of content to be played back continuously.
播放列表最简单的结构是从开始记录一个内容到该记录操作结束之后所得到的一个AV流文件。除非编辑了该AV流文件,否则它会成为一个播放列表。The simplest structure of a playlist is an AV stream file obtained from the beginning of recording a content to the end of the recording operation. Unless the AV stream file is edited, it becomes a playlist.
播放列表是由包括表示再现一个AV流文件的信息,以及设置再现开始点和再现停止点的信息组成的,再现开始点和结束点指定了该AV流文件的再现开始位置和再现停止位置。再现开始点信息和再现停止点信息组成的信息对称为播放项目(PlayItem)。播放列表是由一组播放项目组成的。当再现了一个播放项目时,则再现该播放项目所涉及的AV流文件的部分。The play list is made up of information including information indicating reproduction of an AV stream file, and information for setting a reproduction start point and a reproduction stop point, which designate the reproduction start position and reproduction stop position of the AV stream file. An information pair consisting of reproduction start point information and reproduction stop point information is called a PlayItem (PlayItem). A playlist is composed of a set of play items. When one play item is played back, the part of the AV stream file related to the play item is played back.
如上所述,片断AV流是其视频数据和音频数据已在MPEG2TS(传送流)的格式中多路复用的位流。有关片断AV流的信息记录作为片断信息记录到一个文件中。As described above, the clip AV stream is a bit stream whose video data and audio data have been multiplexed in the format of MPEG2TS (Transport Stream). Information about a clip AV stream is recorded in one file as clip information.
一组片断AV流文件和具有其对应片断信息的片断信息文件作为一个对象处理,并称为片断。一个片断是一个由片断AV流和片断信息组成的对象。A group of clip AV stream files and clip information files with their corresponding clip information are handled as one object and called a clip. A clip is an object composed of a clip AV stream and clip information.
文件通常作为字节序列处理。片断AV流文件的内容在时基(time base)上展开。片断中的进入点是有规律地在时基上指定的。如果给出了一个到预定片断的访问点的时间标记,则可以使用一个片断信息文件,来找寻一个地址的信息,根据该地址从一个片断AV流文件中读出数据。Files are usually handled as sequences of bytes. The content of the clip AV stream file is developed on a time base. Entry points in a segment are regularly specified on a time base. If a time stamp of an access point to a predetermined section is given, a section information file can be used to find information of an address from which data is read from a section AV stream file.
所有记录在一个光盘上的播放列表和片断是使用卷信息管理的。All playlists and clips recorded on a disc are managed using volume information.
图7示出了统一建模语言(uml)示意图,其表示上述片断AV流、片断信息(流属性)、片断、播放项目和播放列表之间的关系。一个播放列表和一个或多个播放项目相关。一个播放项目和一个片断相关。一个片断可以和多个播放项目相关,该播放项目的开始点和/或结束点是不同的。一个片断AV流文件从一个片断中引用。类似地,一个片断信息文件从一个片断中引用。此外,一个片断AV流文件和一个片断信息文件呈一一对应的关系。有了如上述所确定的结构,通过只再现任何部分而不改变目录就可以无破坏性地指定一个再现顺序。FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of Unified Modeling Language (uml), which represents the relationship between the above-mentioned clip AV stream, clip information (stream attributes), clips, playitems, and playlists. A playlist is associated with one or more playitems. A PlayItem is associated with a Clip. A segment can be associated with multiple play items whose start and/or end points are different. One clip AV stream file is referenced from one clip. Similarly, a clip information file is referenced from a clip. In addition, there is a one-to-one correspondence between one clip AV stream file and one clip information file. With the structure defined as above, a reproduction order can be specified non-destructively by reproducing only any part without changing the list.
此外,如图8所示,可以从多个播放列表中引用相同的片断。在图8所示的例子中,片断1从两个播放列表2和3中引用。在图8中,片断1的水平方向表示时基(time base)。播放列表2涉及片断1的区域a到f,其中包括广告消息区域b、c和一个场景e。另一方面,播放列表3涉及片断1的区域d到g,其中包括了一个场景e。当指定播放列表2时,可以再现片断1的区域a到f。当指定播放列表3时,可以再现片断1的区域d到g。Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8, the same segment can be referenced from multiple playlists. In the example shown in FIG. 8 ,
接下来,参照图9,将描述记录在“蓝光光盘可擦写格式版本1.0第三部分”中规定的记录介质中一个用于文件的管理系统。在目录结构中分级地管理文件。在记录介质中创建一个目录(例如图9所示的根目录)。在该目录下,用一个记录和再现系统来管理文件。Next, referring to FIG. 9, a management system for files recorded in a recording medium specified in "Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format Version 1.0
在根目录下,有一个目录BDAV。如图9所示,可以设有BDAV、BDAV1、BDAV2、...、BDAVn等多个目录。在下面的描述中,多个目录BDAV、BDAV1、BDAV2、....BDAVn都由目录BDAV表示。下面将只描述代表性目录BDAV。Under the root directory, there is a directory BDAV. As shown in FIG. 9, multiple directories such as BDAV, BDAV1, BDAV2, . . . , BDAVn, etc. may be provided. In the following description, a plurality of directories BDAV, BDAV1, BDAV2, . . . BDAVn are represented by a directory BDAV. Only the representative directory BDAV will be described below.
在目录BDAV下,有下面六类文件。Under the directory BDAV, there are the following six types of files.
(1)info.bdav(1) info.bdav
(2)menu.tidx,mark.tidx(2) menu.tidx, mark.tidx
(3)menu.tdt1,menu.tdt2,mark.tdt1,mark.tdt2(3) menu.tdt1, menu.tdt2, mark.tdt1, mark.tdt2
(4)#####.rpls,#####.vpls(4) #####.rpls, #####.vpls
(5)%%%%%.clpi(5)%%%%%.clpi
(6)*****.m2ts(6)*****.m2ts
在如(4)分类的文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”中,“####”表示任意数字。类似地,在如(5)分类的文件“%%%%%.clpi”中,“%%%%%”表示任意数字。在如(6)分类的文件“*****.m2ts”中,“*****”表示以一对一的关系对应于文件“%%%%%.clpi”文件的“*****.m2ts”文件的数量。例如,数字“*****”可以与数字“%%%%%”相同。In the files "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls" classified as (4), "####" represents an arbitrary number. Similarly, in the file "%%%%%.clpi" classified as (5), "%%%%%" represents an arbitrary number. In the file "*****.m2ts" classified as (6), "*****" represents "**" corresponding to the file "%%%%%.clpi" file in a one-to-one relationship ***.m2ts" files. For example, the number "*****" can be the same as the number "%%%%%".
如(1)分类的文件“info.bdav”具有所有目录BDAV的信息。如(2)分类的文件“menu.tidx”和“mark.tidx”具有略图画面的信息。如(3)分类的文件“menu.tdt1”、“menu.tdt2”、“mark.tdt1”和“mark.tdt2”具有略图画面。这些文件的扩展名“tdt1”和“tdt2”表示这些文件略图的数据是否已被加密。The file "info.bdav" classified as (1) has information of all directories BDAV. The files "menu.tidx" and "mark.tidx" classified as (2) have information of thumbnail screens. The files "menu.tdt1", "menu.tdt2", "mark.tdt1" and "mark.tdt2" classified as (3) have thumbnail screens. The extensions "tdt1" and "tdt2" of these files indicate whether the data of these file thumbnails is encrypted or not.
如(4)分类的文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”是具有播放列表信息的文件。文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”位于PLAYLIST目录下面,目录PLAYLIST位于目录BDAV下面。The files "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls" classified as (4) are files having playlist information. The files "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls" are located under the PLAYLIST directory, and the directory PLAYLIST is located under the directory BDAV.
如(5)分类的文件“%%%%%.clpi”具有片断信息的文件。文件“%%%%%.CLP”位于目录CLIPINF下面,目录CLIPINF位于目录BDAV下面。如(6)分类的文件“*****.m2ts”是具有片断AV流的片断AV流文件。该片断AV流文件与具有文件名数字“*****”的片断信息文件“%%%%%.clpi”相关。文件“*****.m2ts”位于目录STREAM下面,目录STREAM位于目录BDAV下面。A file "%%%%%.clpi" classified as (5) is a file having clip information. The file "%%%%.%.CLP" is located under the directory CLIPINF, and the directory CLIPINF is located under the directory BDAV. The file "*****.m2ts" classified as (6) is a clip AV stream file having a clip AV stream. This clip AV stream file is related to a clip information file "%%%%%.clpi" having a file name number "******". The file "*****.m2ts" is located under the directory STREAM, and the directory STREAM is located under the directory BDAV.
接下来,将详细描述每个文件。如(1)分类的文件“info.bda”是唯一位于目录BDAV下的文件。图10所示的语法描述了文件“info.bdav”的结构的例子。在这个例子中,该语法是用C语言的描述方法表示的,C语言是用作计算机装置的程序描述语言。这也适用于其它表示语言的图。Next, each file will be described in detail. The file "info.bda" classified as (1) is the only file located under the directory BDAV. The syntax shown in Fig. 10 describes an example of the structure of the file "info.bdav". In this example, the syntax is expressed in the description method of C language, which is used as a program description language for computer devices. This also applies to diagrams in other representation languages.
在图10中,文件“info.bdav”相应于不同功能而分割成块。域type-indicator描述了字符串“BDAV”,该字符串说明了文件是“info.bdav”。域version_number描述了文件“version_number”的版本。块UIAppInfoBDAV()描述了有关位于目录DBAV下的文件的信息。块TableofPlayList()描述了有关播放列表排列的信息。块MakersPrivateData()描述了记录和再现装置的制造者的专有信息。In FIG. 10, the file "info.bdav" is divided into blocks corresponding to different functions. The field type-indicator describes the string "BDAV", which indicates that the file is "info.bdav". The field version_number describes the version of the file "version_number". Block UIAppInfoBDAV() describes information about files located under directory DBAV. The block TableofPlayList() describes information about the arrangement of the playlist. The block MakersPrivateData( ) describes the private information of the maker of the recording and reproducing apparatus.
表示单个块的开始的地址在文件“info.bdav”的开始描述。例如,域TableOfPlayList_Start_address使用文件字节的中相关数量,表示块“TableOfPlayList()”的开始位置。An address indicating the start of a single block is described at the beginning of the file "info.bdav". For example, the field TableOfPlayList_Start_address represents the start position of the block "TableOfPlayList()" using the relative number of bytes in the file.
图11所示的语法描述了块UIAppInfoBDAV()的结构的例子。域length表示了紧接着域length直到块UIAppInfoBDAV()末端的字节的长度。城BDAV_character_set表示在块UIAppInfoBDAV()的域BDAV_name中所描述的字符序列的字符设置。作为一个字符设置,可以选择ASCII、Unicode等。The syntax shown in FIG. 11 describes an example of the structure of the block UIAppInfoBDAV(). The field length indicates the length in bytes following the field length up to the end of the block UIAppInfoBDAV(). BDAV_character_set represents the character set of the character sequence described in the field BDAV_name of the block UIAppInfoBDAV(). As a character setting, ASCII, Unicode, etc. can be selected.
标志BDAV_protect_flag表示是否允许用户无条件地观赏位于目录BDAV下的内容。当标志设置为“1”并且用户输入了正确的个人身份识别号(PIN)时,允许他或她观赏位于目录BDAV下的内容。相反,当标志BDAV_protect_flag设置为“0”,即使用户没有输入他或她的PIN,也允许他或她观赏位于目录BDAV下的内容。The flag BDAV_protect_flag indicates whether or not the user is allowed to watch the content located under the directory BDAV unconditionally. When the flag is set to "1" and the user enters the correct personal identification number (PIN), he or she is allowed to view the content located under the directory BDAV. On the contrary, when the flag BDAV_protect_flag is set to "0", even if the user does not input his or her PIN, he or she is allowed to watch the content located under the directory BDAV.
在域PIN中描述个人身份识别号PIN。个人身份识别号PIN是由例如4个阿拉伯数字所组成的,每个阿拉伯数字是从0到9。个人身份识别号PIN表示当验证再现控制时所需的个人身份识别号码。个人身份识别号PIN的阿拉伯数字是根据例如国际标准化组织(ISO)/国际电工委员会(IEC)646标准而编码的。The personal identification number PIN is described in the domain PIN. The personal identification number PIN is composed of, for example, 4 Arabic numerals, and each Arabic numeral is from 0 to 9. The personal identification number PIN indicates a personal identification number required when authenticating reproduction control. The Arabic numerals of the PIN are coded according to, for example, the International Organization for Standardization (ISO)/International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 646 standard.
使用上述在块UIAppInfoBDAV()中描述的信息,规定了目录BDAV的再现限制。如下面所描述的,每个播放列表的再现限制是用在文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”中所描述的块UIAppInfoBDAV()中所确定的标志playback_control_flag来描述的。Using the information described above in the block UIAppInfoBDAV( ), the reproduction restriction of the directory BDAV is specified. As described below, the playback restriction of each playlist is the flag playback_control_flag determined in the block UIAppInfoBDAV() described in the files "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls" to describe.
在该例中,为了重新开始再现目录BDAV下的内容,可以使用重新开始功能。重新开始功能可以指定优先再现的内容的播放列表。假定当用户想要从上一个停止的位置重新开始再现一个内容时,就使用重新开始功能。In this example, the restart function can be used in order to restart playback of the content under the directory BDAV. The resume function may designate a playlist of content to be reproduced preferentially. It is assumed that the restart function is used when the user wants to restart reproduction of a content from the last stopped position.
在图11中,标志resume_valid_flag描述了该重新开始功能是否有效。当标志的值设置为“0”时,该重新开始功能无效。当标志设置为“1”时,该重新开始功能有效。在这里,将由域resume_PlayList_file_name所指定的播放列表作为要优先再现的播放列表。In FIG. 11, the flag resume_valid_flag describes whether the resume function is valid. When the value of the flag is set to "0", the restart function is invalid. This restart function is valid when the flag is set to "1". Here, the playlist specified by the field resume_PlayList_file_name is used as the playlist to be reproduced preferentially.
域ref_to_menu_thumbnail_index描述了略图号码的区域,略图号码识别具有目录BDAV特征的略图画面。在蓝光光盘标准中,具有目录BDAV特征的静止画面称之为菜单略图。略图画面是目录BDAV的菜单略图,其具有在域ref_to_menu_thumbnail_index中描述的索引thumbnail_index。The field ref_to_menu_thumbnail_index describes the area of the thumbnail number that identifies the thumbnail screen with the feature of the directory BDAV. In the Blu-ray Disc standard, a still picture characteristic of a directory BDAV is called a menu thumbnail. The thumbnail screen is a menu thumbnail of the directory BDAV, which has an index thumbnail_index described in the field ref_to_menu_thumbnail_index.
域BDAV_name_length描述了在域BDAV_name中描述的目录BDAV的名字的字节长度。在域BDAV_name_length中描述的字节数量对于域BDAV_name的字符串是有效的,域BDAV_name_length描述了目录BDAV的名字。在域BDAV_name_length中描述的有效字符串之后其余的字节序列可以有任意值。The field BDAV_name_length describes the byte length of the name of the directory BDAV described in the field BDAV_name. The number of bytes described in the field BDAV_name_length is valid for the character string of the field BDAV_name, and the field BDAV_name_length describes the name of the directory BDAV. The rest of the byte sequence after the valid character string described in the field BDAV_name_length may have any value.
图12所示的语法描述了块TableOfPlayLists()的结构的例子。域number_of_PlayLists描述了位于目录BDAV下的播放列表的数量。播放列表的数量是一个可变的循环。域number_of_PlayLists遵循“for”语句的循环。在“for”语句循环中的域PlayList_file_name中描述的播放列表的排列表示在播放列表表格显示屏幕等上显示的播放列表的顺序。播放列表是用域PlayList_file_name中的例如“#####.rpls”或“#####.vpls”文件名所指定的。The syntax shown in Fig. 12 describes an example of the structure of the block TableOfPlayLists(). The field number_of_PlayLists describes the number of playlists located under the directory BDAV. The number of playlists is a variable loop. The field number_of_PlayLists follows the loop of the "for" statement. The arrangement of playlists described in the field PlayList_file_name in the "for" statement loop indicates the order of playlists displayed on the playlist table display screen or the like. A playlist is specified with a filename such as "#####.rpls" or "#####.vpls" in the field PlayList_file_name.
如上所述,文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”处于目录PLAYLIST之下。这些文件与单独播放列表是一一对应的关系。As mentioned above, the files "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls" are under the directory PLAYLIST. There is a one-to-one correspondence between these files and individual playlists.
图13所示的语法描述了文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”的结构的例子。在图13中,文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”中的任一个都有相应于功能信息的块。域type_indicator描述了表示该文件的字符串。域version_number描述了该文件的版本。The syntax shown in FIG. 13 describes an example of the structure of the files "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls". In FIG. 13, either of the files "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls" has blocks corresponding to function information. The field type_indicator describes a character string representing the file. The field version_number describes the version of this file.
块UIAppInfoPlayList()描述了播放列表的属性信息。块PlayList()描述了有关播放项目的信息,该播放项目组成了播放列表。块PlayListMark()描述了有关添加到播放列表的标志的信息。块MakersPrivateData()描述了装置制造者的唯一信息,该信息已记录在播放列表文件中。域PlayList_start_address、PlayListMark_start_address和MakersPrivateData_start_address位于每个文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”的开始。这些域描述了作为32位地址信息的相应块的开始地址。The block UIAppInfoPlayList() describes the attribute information of the playlist. The block PlayList( ) describes information about the play items that make up the play list. Block PlayListMark() describes information about marks added to a playlist. The block MakersPrivateData( ) describes the unique information of the device maker, which has been recorded in the playlist file. The fields PlayList_start_address, PlayListMark_start_address and MakersPrivateData_start_address are located at the beginning of each file "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls". These fields describe the start address of the corresponding block as 32-bit address information.
由于在每个文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”的开始处描述了每个块的开始地址,任意长度的数据填充词汇可以处于任一个块的前面和/或后面。然而,块UIAppInfoPlayList()的开始位置固定在从每个上述文件的开始的第320字节,块UIAppInfoPlayList()是每个文件“#####.rpls”和“#####.vpls”的起始块。Since the start address of each block is described at the beginning of each file "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls", any length of data padding vocabulary can be placed in front of any block and / or behind. However, the start position of the block UIAppInfoPlayList() is fixed at the 320th byte from the start of each of the above files, and the block UIAppInfoPlayList() is each file "#####.rpls" and "#####.vpls " start block.
图14所示的语法描述了块UIAppInfoPlayList()结构的例子。块UIAppInfoPlayList()描述了有关播放列表的属性信息的不同类型。该属性信息不是直接用于再现播放列表。域PlayList_character_set描述了有关播放列表的字符串信息的字符集。The syntax shown in FIG. 14 describes an example of the block UIAppInfoPlayList() structure. The block UIAppInfoPlayList() describes different types of property information about a playlist. This attribute information is not directly used to reproduce PlayList. The field PlayList_character_set describes the character set of character string information on PlayList.
标志playback_control_flag描述了是否根据个人身份识别码PIN限制信息的显示和播放列表的再现。当标志playback_control_flag的值是例如“1”时,除非用户输入正确的个人身份识别码PIN,否则不会显示例如播放列表的略图画面等信息,也不能再现播放列表。标志write_protect_flag是防擦写标志。有必要构造用户界面,以便当write_protect_flag的值是“1”时,用户不能很容易地擦去播放列表。标志is_played_flag描述了已经再现过的播放列表。标志is_edited_flag描述了已经编辑过的播放列表。The flag playback_control_flag describes whether display of information and reproduction of playlists are restricted according to a personal identification number PIN. When the value of the flag playback_control_flag is, for example, "1", unless the user inputs a correct personal identification code PIN, information such as a thumbnail screen of the playlist is not displayed, and the playlist cannot be reproduced. The flag write_protect_flag is an anti-erasing flag. It is necessary to construct the user interface so that the user cannot easily erase the playlist when the value of write_protect_flag is "1". The flag is_played_flag describes a playlist that has already been reproduced. The flag is_edited_flag describes an edited playlist.
域time_zone描述了记录播放列表的时区。域record_time_and_date描述了记录播放列表的日期和时间。域PlayList_duration描述了播放列表的再现持续时间。The field time_zone describes the time zone in which the playlist is recorded. The field record_time_and_date describes the date and time at which the playlist was recorded. The field PlayList_duration describes the reproduction duration of the PlayList.
域maker_ID和maker_model_code描述可识别记录装置的型号和制造者的信息,该记录装置最后更新该播放列表。域maker_ID和maker_model_code可以例如是数字等。域channel_number描述了所记录的片断AV流的通道号码。域channel_name描述了通道名。域channel_name_length描述了在域channel_name中描述的通道名的长度。在域channel_name中,具有在域channel_name_length中所描述的长度的字符串是有效的。域PlayList_name描述了一个具有在域PlayList_name_length中所描述的一个值的有效长度的播放列表名。域PlayList_detail描述了具有在域PlayList_detail_length中所描述的值的有效长度的播放列表的详细信息。The fields maker_ID and maker_model_code describe information that can identify the model and maker of the recording device that last updated the playlist. The fields maker_ID and maker_model_code may eg be numbers or the like. The field channel_number describes the channel number of the recorded clip AV stream. The field channel_name describes the channel name. The field channel_name_length describes the length of the channel name described in the field channel_name. In the field channel_name, a character string having the length described in the field channel_name_length is valid. The field PlayList_name describes a PlayList name having an effective length of a value described in the field PlayList_name_length. The field PlayList_detail describes detailed information of a PlayList having an effective length of the value described in the field PlayList_detail_length.
图15所示的语法示出了块PlayList()的结构的例子。域length描述了紧接在域length之后直到该块PlayList()的末端的字节长度。域PL_CPI_type描述了播放列表的特征点信息(CPI)的类型。域number_of_PlayItems描述了组成该播放列表的播放项目的数量。域number_of_SubPlayItems描述了播放项目的数量,该播放项目是用于添加到播放列表的后期录音音频(子播放项目)。简而言之,当播放列表满足预定条件时,播放列表可以有子播放项目。The syntax shown in Fig. 15 shows an example of the structure of the block PlayList(). The field length describes the byte length immediately after the field length until the end of this block PlayList(). The field PL_CPI_type describes the type of feature point information (CPI) of PlayList. The field number_of_PlayItems describes the number of PlayItems constituting the PlayList. The field number_of_SubPlayItems describes the number of PlayItems which are post-recorded audio (SubPlayItems) for adding to PlayList. In short, a playlist can have child playitems when the playlist satisfies a predetermined condition.
块PlayItem()描述了播放项目的信息。块SubPlayItem()描述了子播放项目的信息。The block PlayItem() describes the information of the play item. The block SubPlayItem( ) describes the information of the subplayitem.
图16所示的语法描述了块PlayItem()的结构的例子。域Clip_Information_file_name描述了片断信息文件(该文件具有扩展clpi)的文件名的字符串,该文件和一个涉及播放项目的片断有一一对应的关系。片断信息文件具有扩展“clpi”。The syntax shown in Fig. 16 describes an example of the structure of the block PlayItem(). The field Clip_Information_file_name describes a character string of a file name of a clip information file (the file having the extension clpi) which has a one-to-one correspondence with a clip related to a PlayItem. The clip information file has the extension "clpi".
域Clip_codec_identifier描述了片断的编码系统,播放项目涉及该片断。在上述例子中,域Clip_codec_Identifier固定为值“M2TS”。域connection_condition描述的信息是有关于播放项目如何连接到下一个播放项目。换句话说,域connection_condition描述了是否能不间断地再现播放项目。The field Clip_codec_identifier describes the coding system of the clip to which the PlayItem refers. In the above example, the field Clip_codec_Identifier is fixed to the value "M2TS". The field connection_condition describes information on how a PlayItem is connected to the next PlayItem. In other words, the field connection_condition describes whether the PlayItem can be reproduced without interruption.
域ref_to_STC_id描述了一个片断的序列STC_sequence,该片断涉及该播放项目。序列STC_sequence是蓝光光盘标准的独特结构。该结构表示一个范围,其中的程序时钟基准(PCR)在时基上是连续的,PCR是MPEG2TS(传送流)的基准。片断中唯一的数字STC_id被指定到序列STC_sequence。在序列STC_sequence中,由于可以确定一个持续时基,因而能够唯一地指定播放项目的开始时间和结束时间。每个播放项目的开始点和结束点将存在于相同的序列STC_sequence中。域ref_to_STC_id描述了具有number_STC_id的序列STC_sequence。The field ref_to_STC_id describes a sequence STC_sequence of a segment, which relates to this PlayItem. The sequence STC_sequence is a unique structure of the Blu-ray Disc standard. This structure represents a range in which the program clock reference (PCR) is continuous on the time base, and PCR is the reference of MPEG2TS (Transport Stream). A unique number STC_id in a segment is assigned to a sequence STC_sequence. In the sequence STC_sequence, since a continuous time base can be determined, the start time and end time of the play item can be uniquely specified. The start point and end point of each PlayItem will exist in the same sequence STC_sequence. The field ref_to_STC_id describes the sequence STC_sequence with number_STC_id.
域IN_time和OUT_time分别描述了序列STC_sequence中播放项目的起始点和结束点的时间标记pts(presentation_time_stamp)。The fields IN_time and OUT_time respectively describe the time stamps pts (presentation_time_stamp) of the start point and end point of the PlayItem in the sequence STC_sequence.
块BridgeSequenceInfo()描述了有关桥接片断(Bridge_Clip)的信息。如图17所示,桥接片断是当实现用于不间断地再现播放项目时所创建的位流。通过再现桥接片断,而不是再现先前的播放项目和当前播放项目的边界的原始位流,可以不间断地再现两个播放项目。由于桥接片断的功能与本发明没有密切的关系,因此将省略该功能的描述。The block BridgeSequenceInfo( ) describes information about a bridge clip (Bridge_Clip). As shown in FIG. 17, a bridge clip is a bit stream created when implemented for reproducing a PlayItem without interruption. By reproducing the bridge segment instead of reproducing the original bit stream at the boundary of the previous PlayItem and the current PlayItem, two PlayItems can be reproduced without interruption. Since the function of the bridge segment is not closely related to the present invention, the description of this function will be omitted.
图18所示的语法描述了块PlayListMark()的结构的例子。块PlayListMark()具有描述标志信息的数据结构。标志是描述播放列表时间的结构。使用一标志,可以实现对播放列表设置搜索点的功能、将播放列表分割成段的功能等等。此外,使用一个标志,可以在图形平面(将在后面描述)上指示显示开始和显示结束的时间。The syntax shown in Fig. 18 describes an example of the structure of the block PlayListMark(). The block PlayListMark() has a data structure describing mark information. Flags are structures that describe the time of a playlist. Using a flag, a function of setting a search point to a playlist, a function of dividing a playlist into segments, and the like can be realized. Furthermore, using one flag, it is possible to indicate the display start and display end times on a graphics plane (to be described later).
域length描述了紧接在域length之后到块PlayListmark()的末端的字节的长度。域number_of_PlayList_marks描述了播放列表中的标志的数量。一个“for”语句循环表示标志的信息。标记mark_invalid_flag描述了该标志是否有效。当标记mark_invalid_flag的值是“0”时,它说明该标志有效。当标记mark_invalid_flag的值是“1”时,它说明虽然数据库中存在该标志,但是传送给用户的该标志是无效标志。The field length describes the length in bytes immediately after the field length to the end of the block PlayListmark(). The field number_of_PlayList_marks describes the number of marks in the PlayList. A "for" statement loops through the flags for information. The flag mark_invalid_flag describes whether the flag is valid. When the value of the flag mark_invalid_flag is "0", it indicates that the flag is valid. When the value of the mark_invalid_flag is "1", it indicates that although the mark exists in the database, the mark transmitted to the user is an invalid flag.
域mark_type描述了标志的类型。存在有表示作为播放列表的略图画面(代表性画面)的一个画面的位置的标志;表示再现重新开始的位置的重新开始标志;表示一个搜索点的段标志;表示要跳跃并再现的一个区域的跳跃标志;其表示图形图像的阅读开始时间的标志;表示图形图像的显示开始时间的标志;表示图形图像的显示停止时间的标志等等。The field mark_type describes the type of mark. There is a mark representing the position of one screen of a thumbnail screen (representative screen) as a playlist; a restart mark representing a position where reproduction is resumed; a segment mark representing a search point; a mark representing an area to be skipped and reproduced A jump mark; a mark indicating the reading start time of the graphic image; a mark indicating the display start time of the graphic image; a mark indicating the display stop time of the graphic image, and the like.
域mark_name_length描述了域mark_name(将在下面描述)的数据长度。域maker_ID描述了创建该标志的记录装置的制造者。域maker_ID用作识别制造者独有的标志。域ref_to_PlayItem_id描述了哪个播放项目具有该标志所指定的时间。域maker_time_stamp描述了该标志所指定的时间。The field mark_name_length describes the data length of the field mark_name (to be described below). The field maker_ID describes the maker of the recording device that created the logo. The field maker_ID is used as a unique identifier for identifying a maker. The field ref_to_PlayItem_id describes which PlayItem has the time specified by this flag. The field maker_time_stamp describes the time specified by this flag.
域entry_ES_PID描述了该标志添加到哪个基本流(elementary stream)(就是说,该标志是否添加到一个流,在该流中画面数据和/或声音数据被编码)。域ref_to_menu_thumbnail_index和域ref_to_mark_thumbnail_index描述了在视觉上表现标志的略图画面。略图画面可以是例如静止画面,在标志指定的时间提取该画面。The field entry_ES_PID describes to which elementary stream this flag is added (that is, whether this flag is added to a stream in which picture data and/or sound data are encoded). The field ref_to_menu_thumbnail_index and the field ref_to_mark_thumbnail_index describe a thumbnail screen that visually expresses a mark. The thumbnail picture may be, for example, a still picture, which is extracted at a time designated by a mark.
当一个标志具有一个时基上的长度时,使用域duration。当使用跳跃标志时,域duration描述对哪个持续时间执行跳跃。The field duration is used when a marker has a length on a time base. When using the jump flag, the field duration describes for which duration the jump is performed.
域maker_information是一个描述了用户唯一信息的区域。域make_name描述了指定到一个标志的名字。在域mark_name_length中描述了标志的大小。The field maker_information is an area that describes the unique information of the user. The field make_name describes the name assigned to a flag. The size of the mark is described in the field mark_name_length.
图19示出了描述文件“%%%%%.clpi”的结构的例子的语法。如上所述,文件“%%%%%.clpi”位于目录CLIPINF之下。文件“%%%%%.clpi”是为每个AV流文件(文件“*****.m2ts”)创建的。文件“%%%%%.clpi”具有相应于功能信息的块。域type_indicator描述的字符串表示文件。域version_number描述了文件的版本。Fig. 19 shows syntax describing an example of the structure of the file "%%%%%.clpi". As mentioned above, the file "%%%%%.clpi" is located under the directory CLIPINF. A file "%%%%%.clpi" is created for each AV stream file (file "*****.m2ts"). The file "%%%%%.clpi" has blocks corresponding to function information. The character string described by the field type_indicator indicates the file. The field version_number describes the version of the file.
块ClipInfo()描述了有关片断的信息。块SequenceInfo()描述了有关PCR的不连续点的信息,其表示MPEG2系统的传送流的时间坐标。块ProgramInfo()描述了MPEG2系统中一个程序的有关信息。块CPI()描述了有关特征点信息CPI的信息,其表示AV流中的特征位置。块ClipMark()描述的标志信息表示一个搜索索引点,该点添加到一个片断和商业开始和/或结束点。块MakersPrivateData()描述了记录装置的制造者的唯一信息。The block ClipInfo() describes information about the clip. The block SequenceInfo( ) describes information about the discontinuity point of the PCR, which represents the time coordinate of the transport stream of the MPEG2 system. Block ProgramInfo() describes information about a program in the MPEG2 system. The block CPI() describes information about feature point information CPI, which indicates a feature position in the AV stream. Mark information described in the block ClipMark( ) represents a search index point added to a clip and business start and/or end points. The block MakersPrivateData( ) describes the unique information of the maker of the recording device.
表示文件“%%%%%.clpi”中每个块的开始的地址信息被描述为域SequenceInfo_start_address、ProgramInfo_start_address、PCI_start_address、ClipMark_start_address和MakersPrivateData_start_address。由于片断文件“%%%%%.clpi”的功能与本发明没有密切关系,因此省略该文件的描述。Address information representing the start of each block in the file "%%%%%.clpi" is described as fields SequenceInfo_start_address, ProgramInfo_start_address, PCI_start_address, ClipMark_start_address, and MakersPrivateData_start_address. Since the function of the clip file "%%%%%.clpi" is not closely related to the present invention, the description of this file is omitted.
由于BDAV格式具有上述数据结构,播放列表由播放项目组成,该播放项目描述在片断AV流中要再现的部分的多组开始点和结束点,因而可以在用户能识别的再现单元中管理记录在光盘上的内容。Since the BDAV format has the above-mentioned data structure, the PlayList is composed of PlayItems describing sets of start points and end points of parts to be reproduced in the Clip AV stream, and thus can be managed in reproduction units recognizable by the user. content on the disc.
2.本发明的第一模式2. The first mode of the present invention
接下来,将描述本发明的第一模式。根据本发明,上述BDAV格式被扩展。影片数据和字幕数据是相应于实时解码系统的,画面数据是相应于存储的类型解码系统的,它们是独立地提供的,这些数据被组合并显示出来。结果,可以实现一个比现有技术具有更高的灵活性的用户界面。Next, a first mode of the present invention will be described. According to the present invention, the above-mentioned BDAV format is extended. Movie data and subtitle data are corresponding to the real-time decoding system, and picture data are corresponding to the storage type decoding system, which are provided independently, and these data are combined and displayed. As a result, a user interface with higher flexibility than the prior art can be realized.
此外,BDAV格式被扩展,以便与“蓝光光盘可擦写格式版本1.0第三部分”中所规定的播放列表相兼容。结果,实现了交互功能的扩展。在下文中,该扩展的BDAV格式称为BDMV格式。该BDMV格式适用于只再现光盘(蓝光光盘只读存储器:BD-ROM)。Furthermore, the BDAV format is extended so as to be compatible with the playlist specified in "Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format Version 1.0
2-1.关于平面2-1. About plane
根据本发明的第一模式,使用图20所示的平面结构。影片平面10显示在最后端(底部)。影片平面10处理一个播放列表指定的画面(主要是影片数据)。字幕平面11是显示在影片平面10上面的。字幕平面11在再现影片时处理显示的字幕数据。图形平面12是显示在最前面的。图形平面12涉及用于菜单屏幕的字符数据,并且涉及用于按键的例如位映象等图形数据。显示屏幕是由上述三个平面组成的。According to the first mode of the present invention, the planar structure shown in Fig. 20 is used.
本发明和传统DVD视频之间的不同在于:用于字幕、菜单屏幕、按键等的子画面被分成字幕平面11和图形平面12,以便独立地控制字幕和按键。如上所述,在传统DVD视频中,例如菜单屏幕、按键和字幕等图形是由相同的模式控制的。它们显示在同一平面上。在同一时间能够显示的位映象画面的数量限定为1。因而,在DVD视频中,不能同时显示多个位映象画面。相反,根据本发明,由于字幕平面11和图形平面12是为字幕和图形分别独立安排的,因而解决了DVD存在的上述问题。The difference between the present invention and conventional DVD-Video is that subpictures for subtitles, menu screens, buttons, etc. are divided into a
可以认为字幕平面11和图形平面12是“蓝光光盘可擦写格式版本1.0第三部分”的扩展部分。It can be considered that the
影片平面10、字幕平面11和图形平面12可以独立地显示。影片平面10、字幕平面11和图形平面12具有图21所示的分辨率和显示色彩。影片平面10具有的分辨率是1920像素×1080行,每像素的数据长度是16位,还具有YCbCr(4:2:2)的颜色系统,其中Y表示亮度信号、Cb和Cr表示色差信号。YCbCr(4:2:2)具有每像素8位的亮度信号Y、各自8位的色差信号Cb和Cr。色差信号Cb和Cr的两个水平像素组成了一个颜色数据的数据。The
图形平面12具有1920像素×1080行的分辨率、每像素8位的采样深度和可从YCbCr(4:4:4)和RGB(4:4:4)中选择的颜色系统,其中R(红):G(绿):B(蓝)=4:4:4。字幕平面11具有1920像素×1080行的分辨率、每像素8位的采样深度和一个具有使用256色调色板的8位颜色位的映射地址的颜色系统。
图形平面12和字幕平面11可以在256级中α混合。当图形平面12和字幕平面11与另一个平面组合时,可以在256级中设置不透明度。该不透明度可以为每个像素设置。在下面的描述中,该不透明度α表示在范围(0≤α≤1)中,其中不透明度α=0表示完全透明;不透明度α=1表示完全不透明。
字幕平面11处理例如PNG(可移植的网络图象文件格式)格式的画面数据。类似地,图形平面12可以处理PNG格式的画面数据。在PNG格式中,一个像素的采样深度是从1位到16位的范围。当采样深度是8位或16位时,可以为每个像素成分设置阿尔法通道,也就是不透明度信息(称为阿尔法数据)。当采样深度是8位时,可以指定256级的不透明度。利用阿尔法通道的不透明度信息,可以执行α混合。可以使用高达256色的调色板图像。可以使用索引数字表示预备的调色板的成分(索引)。The
此外,字幕平面11和图形平面12处理的画面数据不限于PNG格式。可选地,根据如JPEG系统被压缩编码的画面数据;运行长度压缩的画面数据;或者未被压缩编码的位映象数据,都可以采用。Furthermore, picture data handled by the
图22示出了参照图20和图21组合的三个平面的结构的例子。影片平面10的影片数据提供给422/444转换电路20。该422/444转换电路20将影片数据的颜色系统从YCbCr(4:2:2)转换到YCbCr(4:4:4),并且将转换后的数据输入到乘法装置21。FIG. 22 shows an example of the structure of three planes combined with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 . The movie data of the
字幕平面11的画面数据输入到一个调色板22。调色板22输出RGB(4:4:4)的画面数据。当为画面数据指定了α混合的不透明度时,从调色板22输入指定的不透明度α1(0≤α≤1)。The picture data of the
图23示出了调色板22的输入/输出数据的一个例子。该调色板22拥有调色板信息,该信息作为相应于例如PNG格式文件的一个表格。引用索引数字作为来自调色板22的8位输入数据的画面数据的一个地址。根据该索引数字,输出每个由8位数据组成的RGB(4:4:4)数据。此外,阿尔法通道的数据α从调色板22得到,它表示不透明度。An example of input/output data of the
图24示出了调色板22具有的调色板表格的一个例子。256色索引的值从[0x00]到[0xFF](其中[0x]表示16进制符号),上述值指定了三个初始色值R、G和B,以及不透明度α,它们以8个数据位表示。调色板22根据输入PNG格式画面数据引用调色板表格,并且根据由该画面数据指定的索引值,输出每像素各自8位的颜色数据R、G和B(RGB数据)以及不透明度α。FIG. 24 shows an example of a palette table that the
从调色板22输出的RGB数据提供给RGB/YCbCr转换电路29。RGB/YCbCr转换电路29将RGB数据转换成分别为8位的亮度信号Y、色差信号Cb和Cr(在下文中它们合起来称为YCbCr数据)。这是由于平面数据应该组合在共用的数据格式中。数据统一成YCbCr数据,该YCbCr数据是影片数据的数据格式。RGB data output from the
从RGB/YCbCr转换电路29输出的YCbCr数据和不透明度数据α1被输入乘法装置23。乘法装置23用不透明度数据α1乘以输入的YCbCr数据。乘法的结果输入到加法装置24的一个输入端。乘法装置23用不透明度数据α1乘以YCbCr数据的每个亮度信号Y、色差信号Cb和Cr。不透明度数据α1的补数(1-α1)提供给乘法装置21。The YCbCr data and opacity data α1 output from the RGB/
乘法装置21用不透明度α1的补数(1-α1)乘以从422/444转换电路20中输入的影片数据。相乘结果输入到加法装置24的其它输入端。加法装置24将乘法装置21和乘法装置23的相乘结果相加。结果,影片平面10和字幕平面11组合在一起。加法装置24的相加结果输入到乘法装置25。The multiplication means 21 multiplies the film data input from the 422/444
图形平面12的画面数据输入到RGB/YCbCr转换电路27。当图形平面12的画面数据的颜色系统是RGB(4:4:4)时,将其转换成YCbCr(4:4:4),并从RGB/YCbCr转换电路电路26输出。从RGB/YCbCr转换电路26输出的YCbCr数据输入到乘法装置27。Screen data of the
图形平面12使用的画面数据是PNG格式的,可以为画面数据的每个像素设置不透明度数据α2(0≤α2≤1)。不透明度数据α2提供给乘法装置27。乘法装置27用不透明度数据α2乘以从RGB/YCbCr转换电路26输入的YCbCr数据的每个亮度信号Y、色差信号Cb和Cr。乘法装置27的相乘结果输入到加法装置28的一个输入端。不透明度数据α2的一个补数(1-α2)提供给乘法装置25。The picture data used by the
乘法装置25用不透明度α2的补数(1-α2)乘以加法装置24的相加结果。乘法装置25的相乘结果输入到加法装置28的另一个输入端。加法装置28将乘法装置25和乘法装置27的相乘结果相加。结果,影片平面10以及字幕平面11组合的结果与图形平面12组合在一起。The multiplying means 25 multiplies the addition result of the adding means 24 by the complement of the opacity α2 (1-α2). The multiplication result of the multiplication means 25 is input to the other input terminal of the addition means 28 . The addition means 28 adds the multiplication results of the multiplication means 25 and the multiplication means 27 . As a result, the
当字幕平面11和图形平面12中的无画面区域的不透明度α设置成0(α=0)时,平面11和平面12下面的平面就变成透明的。结果,例如,影片平面10的影片数据可以作为字幕平面11和图形平面12的背景而显示。When the opacity α of the non-picture area in the
图22所示的结果可以用硬件或软件之一来实现。The result shown in Fig. 22 can be realized by either hardware or software.
2-2.菜单屏幕2-2. Menu screen
引导用户实现一个操作的屏幕,例如,菜单屏幕,可以显示在图形平面12上。图25示出了显示在图形平面12上的菜单屏幕60的一个例子。在菜单屏幕60上,特征和图像显示在特别的位置。菜单屏幕60用字符和图像提供给用户一个图形用户界面(GUI),该界面允许他或她选择一个新操作。A screen that guides the user to perform an operation, for example, a menu screen, may be displayed on the
“链接”描述了访问具有字符串或图像数据的预定文件的方法。当用户在具有例如定位装置等的屏幕上指定字符串或图像数据时,他或她可以根据字符串或图像数据所指定的访问方法,访问预定文件。“按键”可以有例如三种类型的图像数据,该数据表示正常状态、选择状态和用于“链接”的按下状态。当用户指定一个按键图像时,该图像数据根据他或她所操作的状态而作出改变,以便他或她能容易地识别该按键的状态。"Link" describes a method of accessing a predetermined file having character string or image data. When a user designates character strings or image data on a screen with, for example, a pointing device, he or she can access a predetermined file according to an access method designated by the character string or image data. "Key" can have, for example, three types of image data representing a normal state, a selected state, and a pressed state for "link". When the user designates a key image, the image data is changed according to the state of his or her operation so that he or she can easily recognize the state of the key.
当用户指定一个“链接”或一个“按键”时,他或她在屏幕上使用例如鼠标等工具移动光标,并且在字符串或“链接”的图像上或“按键”的图像上点击鼠标按键(按鼠标按键几次)。相同的操作也可以用鼠标之外的另一个指示装置完成。可选地,使用远程控制命令器或键盘的键操作,用户可以指定一个“链接”或“按键”。在这里,用户使用例如一个方向键等预定键选择他或她想要的“链接”或“按键”,并且使用OK键或类似的键指定选择的“链接”或“按键”。When the user designates a "link" or a "button", he or she moves the cursor on the screen using a tool such as a mouse, and clicks the mouse button on the image of the character string or "link" or on the image of the "button" ( press the mouse button several times). The same operation can also be done with another pointing device other than a mouse. Alternatively, using a remote control commander or keystrokes of a keyboard, the user may assign a "link" or "key." Here, the user selects his or her desired "link" or "key" using a predetermined key such as an arrow key, and designates the selected "link" or "key" using an OK key or the like.
例如如图25所示,作为图像数据的标题61显示在菜单屏幕60的上部,菜单屏幕60显示在图形平面12上。标题61下面是作为链接的选择项目62A、62B、62C和62D。当用户使用例如远程控制命令器的键操作,选择并指定选择项目62A、62B、62C和62D之一时,链接到所指定的操作项目的一个文件被访问。For example, as shown in FIG. 25 , a title 61 as image data is displayed on the upper portion of a menu screen 60 which is displayed on the
在菜单屏幕60的下面位置,显示按键64和65。使用按键64和65,可以显示字幕,并且从例如英文和日文中选择输出声音的语言。当以上述方式操作按键64和65时,访问要用作显示其设置屏幕的文件,并显示预定的屏幕。At the lower position of the menu screen 60, keys 64 and 65 are displayed. Using the keys 64 and 65, subtitles can be displayed, and a language for outputting sound can be selected from, for example, English and Japanese. When the keys 64 and 65 are operated in the above-described manner, a file to be used as a setting screen for display thereof is accessed, and a predetermined screen is displayed.
此外,在菜单屏幕60的左下部分,显示了字符串63,其描述了用于选择项目的方法。字符串63显示在图形平面12上。Also, in the lower left part of the menu screen 60, a character string 63 describing a method for selecting an item is displayed. A character string 63 is displayed on the
要显示例如如图25所示的一个屏幕,需要任意的描述语言,用于描述屏幕显示方法、链接信息等。根据本发明的第一模式,使用超文本链接标示语言(HTML)作为描述语言,该语言已经在万维网(WWW)中广泛流传。To display a screen such as that shown in FIG. 25, an arbitrary description language is required for describing a screen display method, link information, and the like. According to the first mode of the present invention, Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), which has been widely spread on the World Wide Web (WWW), is used as a description language.
众所周知,HTML文档使用标记描述文档结构。标记是由一对表示一个范围的开始和结束的符号组成的。将标记嵌入一个文本以指定任意范围。例如,这样描述一个表示范围开始的开始标记,即通过用符号“<”和“>”包围一个确定为字符串的元素。类似地,这样描述一个表示范围结束的结束标记,即通过用符号“</”和“>”包围与开始标记中相同的字符串。其中可以描述标记所表示的元素的属性。结束标记可以忽略。此外,一些元素不需要描述它们的结束标记。As we all know, HTML documents use markup to describe the document structure. A marker consists of a pair of symbols that indicate the start and end of a range. Embed tags into a text to specify an arbitrary range. For example, an opening tag indicating the start of a range is described by surrounding an element determined to be a character string with symbols "<" and ">". Similarly, an end tag indicating the end of a range is described by surrounding the same character string as in the start tag with symbols "</" and ">". where attributes of the element represented by the markup can be described. Closing tags can be ignored. Also, some elements do not need to describe their closing tags.
在HTML中描述的文档位于连接到互联网的网络服务器中,由网络服务器向互联网公布。通过安装在例如个人计算机等连接到互联网的计算机装置中的浏览软件,可以浏览该文档。根据本发明的第一模式,HTML标准被独特地扩展,以便显示用于蓝光光盘的菜单屏幕。Documents described in HTML are located in a web server connected to the Internet, and are published to the Internet by the web server. This document can be browsed by browsing software installed in a computer device connected to the Internet such as a personal computer. According to the first mode of the present invention, the HTML standard is uniquely extended in order to display a menu screen for a Blu-ray disc.
例如,在WWW上,有了在HTML文档中描述的链接信息,浏览软件可以链接并阅读由链接信息指定的另一个HTML文档。另一方面,可以预期,在用于蓝光光盘的菜单屏幕60中,可以用图像数据、字符串、按键等显示播放列表表格。此外,可以预期,通过指定一个播放列表,可以从光盘中阅读并再现指定的播放列表。For example, on WWW, with link information described in an HTML document, browsing software can link and read another HTML document specified by the link information. On the other hand, it is contemplated that in the menu screen 60 for Blu-ray Disc, a playlist table may be displayed with image data, character strings, keys, and the like. Furthermore, it is contemplated that by specifying a playlist, the specified playlist can be read and reproduced from the optical disc.
HTML的扩展相当于例如在一个程序语言中确定的新功能,或确定的一个新应用编程接口(API)。The extension of HTML corresponds to, for example, a new function defined in a programming language, or a new application programming interface (API) defined.
2-3.关于脚本2-3. About the script
在图25所示的例子中,一个播放列表的表格显示在菜单屏幕60上。事实上,菜单屏幕60的图像和声音以及根据在菜单屏幕60上选择的项目所生成的那些,被组合成多个播放列表。当组成一个菜单项目的多个播放列表相互关连时,可以完成将一个故事分成若干分支的方案。当将一个故事分成若干分支时,可以实现多故事功能以及父母功能,多故事功能使得故事的内容根据用户的选择而作出改变,父母功能使得场景根据用户的年龄而改变。In the example shown in FIG. 25, a list of playlists is displayed on the menu screen 60. As shown in FIG. In fact, images and sounds of the menu screen 60 and those generated according to items selected on the menu screen 60 are combined into a plurality of playlists. The scenario of branching a story into several branches can be accomplished when multiple playlists making up one menu item are interrelated. When a story is divided into several branches, the multi-story function and the parent function can be realized. The multi-story function makes the content of the story change according to the user's choice, and the parent function makes the scene change according to the user's age.
虽然这些功能对于重编码光盘是特别地有效的,但是在当前蓝光光盘标准中没有规定它们,蓝光光盘标准主要目的是记录/再现电视广播。Although these functions are particularly effective for re-encoded discs, they are not specified in the current Blu-ray Disc standard, whose main purpose is to record/reproduce television broadcasts.
在屏幕上显示的信息不仅可以根据HTML描述,还可以根据例如XHTML(扩展HTML)来描述,XHTML是新近的HTML4.0的版本。此外,在屏幕上的信息可以用另一种置标语言来描述。Information displayed on the screen can be described not only in terms of HTML but also in terms of, for example, XHTML (Extended HTML), which is a recent version of HTML 4.0. In addition, the information on the screen can be described in another markup language.
在下面的描述中,安排了多个播放列表的结构,称为脚本。图26示出了脚本70的内在结构的例子。脚本70有多个播放列表73A到73M。此外,脚本70有两部分(屏幕80A和80B),在屏幕上用图形平面12显示分支选择屏幕。例如,屏幕80A具有图形数据74A和播放列表73C,其显示了一个分支选择屏幕。类似地,屏幕80B具有图形数据74B和播放列表73J,其显示了一个分支选择屏幕。In the following description, a structure of multiple playlists is arranged, which is called a script. FIG. 26 shows an example of the internal structure of the
脚本指定了播放列表的排列,以及播放列表显示在图形平面12上显示出来的时间。图形平面12上的播放列表的显示时间可以用播放列表上的标志来指定。下面将描述如何确定脚本70中的事件句柄71和72。The script specifies the arrangement of the playlist and the time at which the playlist is displayed on the
图26所示的例子中,菜单屏幕60上的选择项目(例如,选择项目62A)对应于脚本70中由“进入”表示的播放列表73A。换句话说,当在菜单屏幕60上指定选择项目62A时,再现脚本70的播放列表73A。播放列表73A再现完毕后,接下来再现播放列表73B。播放列表73B再现完毕后,再现播放列表73C。其后,阅读图形数据74A。结果,显示提示用户选择一个故事的屏幕80A。In the example shown in FIG. 26 , the selection item (eg, selection item 62A) on the menu screen 60 corresponds to the
显示屏幕80A之后,根据用户的选择将故事分成若干分支。在图26所示的例子中,当完成第一个选择后,显示屏幕80A。此后,逐个地显示播放列表73D、73E、73F。结果,完成了脚本70的显示。播放列表73F再现完毕后,可以再次显示主菜单屏幕(例如,菜单屏幕60)。After displaying
当在屏幕80A上完成了第二个选择之后,显示过屏幕80A之后,再现播放列表73G。例如在播放列表73G中的预定时间设置一个标志。当再现了播放列表73B之后,可以在标志的位置对播放列表73G进行分支,或根据再现装置的设置、用户的另一个脚本或分支选择屏幕上的选择,完整地再现播放列表73G。当播放列表73G再现后,接下来再现播放列表73M和73I。此后,再现播放列表73J。When the second selection is made on the
当在标志的位置将播放列表73G分支后,连接地再现播放列表73K和73L。播放列表73L再现完毕后,在播放列表73I中设置的标志的位置重新开始再现。When the
在播放列表73J中,阅读图形数据74B。显示屏幕80B,其提示用户选择故事的一个分支。在屏幕80B的第一个选择中,再现播放列表73F。在屏幕80B的第二个选择中,从播放列表73K中设置的标志的位置开始,再现播放列表73K。In the
标志,用户的一个输入,以及播放器的操作改变是根据事件驱动模型检测的。换句话说,当开始再现一个播放列表时,就完成了一个播放列表的再现,当开始再现一个播放列表时,或用户通过远程控制命令器的键操作输入数据时,检测一个标志,发生一个事件。当程序有一个对当前事件发生而执行的事件句柄时,播放器执行事件所期望的操作。Flags, an input from the user, and player manipulation changes are detected according to an event-driven model. In other words, when reproduction of a playlist is started, the reproduction of a playlist is completed, when reproduction of a playlist is started, or when the user inputs data by key operation of the remote control commander, a flag is detected, and an event occurs . When the program has an event handler that executes on the occurrence of the current event, the player performs the action expected by the event.
图26所示的脚本70有两个事件句柄71和72。其中,事件句柄71是整体事件句柄,其描述了对整个脚本70都有效的事件句柄。The
即使脚本70的播放列表73A到73M的任意一个播放列表正在再现中,当按下远程控制命令器的菜单按键时,显示脚本表格的菜单屏幕60。换句话说,将描述执行菜单屏幕60的播放列表的再现处理的一个操作。其中,作为对应于一个事件的事件句柄,当按下远程控制命令器的菜单按键时该事件发生(菜单按键事件),一个使得再现菜单屏幕60的播放列表的命令被描述为整体事件句柄71。Even if any one of the
事件句柄72是一个局部事件句柄,其只在再现预定的播放列表或显示预定的用户输入屏幕时执行。例如,当用户在屏幕80A上指定一个显示的链接作为分支选择屏幕,相对于作为局部事件句柄的该链接指定的事件,通过描述一个命令,实现用于再现另一个播放列表的操作。The event handler 72 is a local event handler which is executed only when a predetermined playlist is reproduced or a predetermined user input screen is displayed. For example, when the user specifies a displayed link on the
在本发明的第一模式中,使用脚本语言ECMA脚本确定上述事件句柄。ECMA脚本是根据JavaScript(已注册商标)的交叉平台脚本语言。ECMA脚本是欧洲计算机制造商协会(ECMA)规定的。ECMA脚本与HTML文档有高度紧密的关系,并且能确定独特的对象。因而,ECMA脚本适用于本发明的第一模式。In the first mode of the present invention, the above-mentioned event handlers are determined using the scripting language ECMA script. ECMA Script is a cross-platform scripting language based on JavaScript (registered trademark). ECMA scripts are specified by the European Computer Manufacturers Association (ECMA). ECMA scripts have a high degree of affinity with HTML documents and can identify unique objects. Thus, ECMA script is suitable for the first mode of the present invention.
2-4.关于虚拟播放器模型2-4. About the virtual player model
接下来将描述提供给图形平面12的再现装置的模型,并在以HTML和ECMA脚本扩展的BDAV格式中操作。模型再现装置称为BD(蓝光光盘)虚拟播放器。BD虚拟播放器的结构的定义称为BD虚拟模型。Next, a model of a rendering device provided to the
接下来,参照图27描述BD虚拟播放器模型。BD虚拟播放器30从蓝光光盘(以下称为光盘)中再现数据。BD虚拟播放器30是例如个人计算机等计算机环境中的一个对象。计算机环境并不限于多用途个人计算机。计算机环境还包括安装在专用再现装置和/或记录和再现装置中的软件环境,上述装置再现来自例如蓝光光盘或类似光盘中的数据。Next, a BD virtual player model will be described with reference to FIG. 27 . The BD
BD虚拟播放器30大致有两个状态A和B。在状态A中,BD虚拟播放器30再现一个播放列表和图形。在状态B中,BD虚拟播放器30停止再现播放列表和图形。对BD虚拟播放器30某一对象的命令执行从一个状态到另一个状态的状态改变,以及在某一状态中指定下一个操作。The BD
状态A具有多个操作。作为在状态A中的操作,可以有快速再现、例如反向再现等可变速度再现以及特殊再现,例如跳跃再现,该再现可以从光盘中任一时刻开始。当显示图形平面12的数据时,需要限定BD虚拟再现30的可变速度再现和特殊再现。State A has multiple operations. As operations in state A, there are fast reproduction, variable speed reproduction such as reverse reproduction, and special reproduction such as skip reproduction, which can be started from any time in the disc. When displaying data of the
重放控制(PBC)程序40对应于记录在光盘上的一个脚本。正如下面将要描述的,脚本描述了用于记录在光盘上的播放列表的一个再现方法,以及用于菜单屏幕的一个显示方法。PBC程序40和BD虚拟播放器30通过应用编程接口(API)41交换方法,以再现记录在光盘上的播放列表。The playback control (PBC)
实际上,当改变了BD虚拟播放器30的状态时,PBC程序40使得将必要信息通过API41传送到共用参数32,该参数确定为BD虚拟播放器30的专用存储器。直接使用再现命令31,通过API41在PBC40和BD虚拟播放器30之间交换的方法,来设置共用参数32。In fact, when the state of the BD
根据本发明的第一模式,如上所述,在事件驱动模型下控制BD虚拟播放器30。当操作BD虚拟播放器30时,发生不同的事件。例如当用户操作一个键输入或操作远程控制命令器或发生时间中断时,硬件/OS(操作系统)50生成事件。事件发送到BD虚拟播放器30。可选地,当在再现的播放列表中检测到标志时,可以生成事件。进一步,事件可以由BD虚拟播放器30自身生成,例如检测到播放器的再现改变了的状态。用事件泡(bubble)的原理处理事件。According to the first mode of the present invention, as described above, the BD
发生的事件的类型在BD虚拟播放器模型中确定。当一个事件发生时,如果已对该事件句柄进行了描述,则执行该事件句柄。如果没有描述事件句柄,则执行默认的事件句柄,并且执行用于播放器的标准规定的一个操作。The type of event that occurs is determined in the BD virtual player model. When an event occurs, the event handler is executed if it has been described. If no event handler is described, the default event handler is executed, and an operation prescribed by the standard for the player is performed.
当执行了用于播放器操作的一个方法时,相对于该方法,用一个返回值表示再现操作是否已正常开始的结果。另一方面,仅使用发生了一个事件的事实,得到结束时间,在该时间完成了一个命令。因而,当脚本程序中描述了开始再现脚本的结束部分的一个方法时,优选为与一个事件句柄一起描述该方法,上述事件句柄接收了一个事件句柄,该事件句柄接收脚本的结束,并且执行它。When a method for player operation is executed, with respect to this method, a return value indicates the result of whether or not the reproduction operation has normally started. On the other hand, using only the fact that an event occurred, one gets the end time, at which time a command is completed. Therefore, when a method for starting reproduction of the end portion of the script is described in the script program, it is preferable to describe the method together with an event handler that receives an event handler that receives the end of the script and executes it. .
对于相同的事件,每个脚本中的事件句柄可以是不同的。Event handlers can be different in each script for the same event.
BD虚拟播放器30的中断事件大致分类为(1)在正在再现的内容中发生的事件;(2)由用户的中断所发生的事件;(3)由于播放器的状态改变而发生的事件。Interruption events of the BD
事件(1)发生在正在再现在内容中,是一个预定中断。不论何时再现内容,事件(1)都会同时发生。当BD虚拟播放器30在一个播放列表中再现时,当播放列表中描述的标志指定的时间在光盘上已过去时,标志检测中断发生在BD虚拟播放器30中。当脚本指定了一个计时器时,计时器中断事件在该指定时间发生,或者在脚本指定的计时器设置时间之后10秒发生。Event (1) occurs in content being reproduced, and is a scheduled interruption. Event (1) occurs simultaneously whenever content is reproduced. When the BD
事件(2)是用户中断,其发生和发生时间是不能预知的。当用户操作远程控制命令器的一个键时,发生中断事件。在这种情况下,由于不能确定什么时间用户执行键操作,因此无法提前预知时间。Event (2) is a user interrupt whose occurrence and timing are unpredictable. An interrupt event occurs when the user operates a key of the remote control commander. In this case, since it cannot be determined when the user performs the key operation, the time cannot be predicted in advance.
事件(3)的发生是由于BD虚拟播放器30的状态改变。事件(3)通知声音流或字幕的改变。当对于一个内容,播放器的状态从再现状态转变到停止状态,或者反之,则发生该事件。一个由播放器的状态改变而导致的事件可以与事件(1)一起发生,事件(1)在正在再现的内容中发生;也可以在事件(2)中发生,事件(2)的发生是由于用户的中断事件。作为通知声音流或字幕的改变的事件的一个例子,当发生用户远程控制命令器的键操作的中断事件时,改变声音流或字幕。结果,由于BD虚拟播放器30的状态改变了,发生了通知状态改变的事件。Event (3) occurs due to a state change of the BD
在本发明的第一模式中,以HTML(超文本链接标示语言)4.01文档或XHTML(扩展HTML)文档描述使用图形平面12的显示控制。使用HTML4.0内置事件,和为用于图形平面12的显示屏幕的事件。如果需要HTML4.0内置事件之外的事件,可以使用ECMA脚本描述它们。In the first mode of the present invention, display control using the
当组合使用HTML格式和ECMA脚本时,如果发生一个事件,根据文档中是否存在一个事件句柄来执行一个处理,该事件句柄是用该事件的元素属性指定的。当存在事件句柄时,则执行它。当不存在事件句柄时,确定文档中是否存在整体事件句柄。结果,如果整体事件句柄存在在文档中,则执行该事件句柄。当文档没有以脚本语言描述一个事件句柄时,BD虚拟播放器30执行一个为该事件准备的默认事件。When HTML format and ECMA script are used in combination, if an event occurs, a process is performed depending on whether an event handler exists in the document, which is specified with the element attribute of the event. When an event handler exists, it is executed. Determines whether an overall event handler exists in the document when no event handler exists. As a result, if an overall event handler exists in the document, that event handler is executed. When the document does not describe an event handler in the script language, the BD
可以将事件句柄描述为HTML文档的元素的属性,或者是ECMA脚本的俘获事件方法。An event handler can be described as an attribute of an element of an HTML document, or as an event-catching method of an ECMA script.
接下来,将描述用于描述一个事件句柄的方法,该句柄使用HTML文档。可以使用HTML4.0描述的内置事件,例如,事件onload、事件onunload、事件onclick,以及事件onkeypress。这些事件的每一个都描述为标记的元素中的属性。Next, a method for describing an event handler using an HTML document will be described. Built-in events described in HTML4.0 may be used, for example, event onload, event onunload, event onclick, and event onkeypress. Each of these events is described as an attribute in the tagged element.
当用户代理结束用成对的标记<FRAMESET></FRAMESET>所确定的一个窗口或所有的帧(frame)时,发生事件onload。当显示菜单屏幕时,发生事件onload。The onload event occurs when the user agent finishes a window or all frames identified by the paired <FRAMESET></FRAMESET> tags. The event onload occurs when the menu screen is shown.
窗口是一个单元,浏览应用程序在其中根据HTML的描述显示一个HTML文件。使用帧在一个窗口的分割的区域中显示多个HTML文件。帧中的HTML文件和帧本身称为帧。事件onload属性可以和元素BODY和元素FRAMESET一起使用。A window is a unit in which a browsing application displays an HTML document according to an HTML description. Use frames to display multiple HTML files in divided areas of a window. HTML files within frames and frames themselves are called frames. The event onload attribute can be used with element BODY and element FRAMESET.
当用户代理将HTML文档从一个窗口或一个帧移开时,发生事件onunload。事件onunload属性可以与元素BODY和元素FRAMESET一起使用。The event onunload occurs when the user agent moves the HTML document away from a window or a frame. The event onunload attribute can be used with element BODY and element FRAMESET.
当用定位装置或类似装置定位一个元素时,发生事件onclick。例如,当执行鼠标按键的点击操作时,发生事件onclick。事件onclick属性可以和HTML 4.0的任意元素一起使用。The event onclick occurs when an element is positioned with a spotter or similar. For example, the event onclick occurs when a mouse button click operation is performed. The event onclick attribute can be used with any HTML 4.0 element.
当按下一个键或从某一元素释放一个键时,发生事件onkeypress。例如,当在键盘上按下一个预定键,或在一个区域中按下远程控制命令器的键,该区域是由屏幕上的特殊元素确定的,而且该键处于选择状态,则发生事件onkeypress。事件onkeypress属性可以和HTML 4.0的任意元素一起使用。The event onkeypress occurs when a key is pressed or released from an element. For example, the event onkeypress occurs when a predetermined key is pressed on the keyboard, or a key of the remote control commander is pressed in an area determined by a particular element on the screen, and the key is in the selected state. The event onkeypress attribute can be used with any HTML 4.0 element.
在本发明第一模式中,由于BD虚拟播放器30的操作不能用上述HTML的事件充分地控制,有必要确定初始事件。图28示出了BD虚拟播放器30中确定的的初始事件的例子。在HTML文档中用ECMA脚本控制事件。作为指定一个事件句柄的属性名,将“on”添加到事件名的开始。In the first mode of the present invention, since the operation of the BD
当倒数计时器的值是“0”或者当正数计时器的值达到预定值时,发生事件TimerFired。当再现停止或暂停时,发生事件PlayStopped和事件PlayStilled。当暂停状态释放时,发生事件StillReleased。当用户暂时停止再现和当用户再现再现的暂停状态时,发生事件PlayPaused和事件PauseReleased。当再现开始时发生事件PlayStarted。当检测到要重复地再现的一个区域时,发生事件PlayRepeated。The event TimerFired occurs when the value of the countdown timer is "0" or when the value of the countdown timer reaches a predetermined value. When reproduction is stopped or paused, the event PlayStopped and the event PlayStilled occur. The event StillReleased occurs when the suspended state is released. The event PlayPaused and the event PauseReleased occur when the user temporarily stops reproduction and when the user reproduces the paused state of reproduction. The event PlayStarted occurs when playback starts. The event PlayRepeated occurs when a region to be reproduced repeatedly is detected.
当子画面(字幕)流的显示/不显示状态改变时,发生事件SPDisplayStatusChanged。当要再现的音频流和视频流改变时,分别发生事件SelectedAudioChanged和事件VideoStopped。The event SPDisplayStatusChanged occurs when the display/non-display status of the sub-picture (subtitle) stream is changed. When the audio stream and the video stream to be reproduced change, the event SelectedAudioChanged and the event VideoStopped occur respectively.
当检测到脚本的开始和结束时,分别地发生事件ScenarioStarted和事件ScenarioEnded。当检测到播放列表的开始和结束时,分别地发生事件PlayListStarted和事件PlayListEnded。当检测到播放项目的开始和结束时,分别地发生事件PlayItemStarted和事件PlayItemEnded。Event ScenarioStarted and event ScenarioEnded occur when the start and end of the script are detected, respectively. When the start and end of the playlist are detected, the event PlayListStarted and the event PlayListEnded occur, respectively. When the start and end of a PlayItem are detected, the event PlayItemStarted and the event PlayItemEnded occur, respectively.
当正在再现一个播放列表的同时检测到一个标志时,发生事件MarkEncountered。当图像数据显示在例如图形平面12时,使用该事件。检测的标志的类型的数量在共用参数32中说明。The event MarkEncountered occurs when a mark is detected while a playlist is being reproduced. This event is used when image data is displayed on the
当按下位于屏幕上的按键时,发生事件ButtonPressed。例如,当通过鼠标的键操作或点击操作,虚拟地按下位于图形平面12上的按键时,发生事件ButtonPressed。The event ButtonPressed occurs when a button located on the screen is pressed. For example, when a key on the
当开始一个有效周期时,发生事件ValidPeriodStarted。可以为一个有效周期选择一个链接,当指定该周期时,可以使用事件ValidPeriodStarted。当有效周期结束时,发生事件ValidPeriodEnded。当强制地执行该链接时,使用该事件。The event ValidPeriodStarted occurs when a valid period is started. A link can be selected for a valid period, when the period is specified, the event ValidPeriodStarted can be used. When the valid period ends, the event ValidPeriodEnded occurs. This event is used when the link is enforced.
当按下远程控制命令器的一个键时,发生事件KeyPressed。用事件句柄的“转换”状态或类似状态,识别所按下键的类型。The event KeyPressed occurs when a key of the remote control commander is pressed. Use the event handler's "transition" state, or similar, to identify the type of key that was pressed.
2-5.关于方法2-5. About the method
图29A、图29B、图30A、图30B、图30C、图30D、图31A、图31B、图31C和图31D示出了BD虚拟播放器30具有的方法的例子,这是在本发明的第一模式中确定的。通过这些命令,确定了BD虚拟播放器30的操作和状态、以及关于视频流、音频流的恢复和控制信息、以及子画面(字幕平面11上的图像数据)、共用参数32的操作、用于计时器和键输入中断的程序、图形平面12上的画面数据句柄的控制。Figure 29A, Figure 29B, Figure 30A, Figure 30B, Figure 30C, Figure 30D, Figure 31A, Figure 31B, Figure 31C and Figure 31D show an example of the method that the BD
当在PBC程序中使用这些方法时,可以控制BD虚拟播放器30的操作。这些方法构造在图27所示的API41中。根据PBC程序40,通过API41访问这些方法。根据这些方法,控制用于BD虚拟播放器30的光盘的再现。下面将描述PBC程序40的真实例子。When these methods are used in the PBC program, the operation of the BD
接下来,将描述用于播放器操作的方法。方法playScenario(scenarioNumber,[scenarioTime])再现“scenarioNumber”指定的脚本。“scenarioNumber”是一个URI(通用资源识别器),其表示描述了脚本结构的文件的位置。方法playPlayList(playListNumber)使得再现“playPlayList”指定的播放列表。方法playChapterMark(playListNumber,chapterNumber)从“chapterNumber”指定的章节,再现一个播放列表,该列表是由“playListNumber”指定的。方法playPlayItem(playListNumber,playListNumber)从“playItemNumber”指定的播放项目由“playListNumber”指定一个播放列表。“playListNumber”是“playItem_id”。当“playItem_id”的值指定为“0”时,从开始再现隶属于一个播放列表的播放项目。Next, methods for player operations will be described. The method playScenario(scenarioNumber, [scenarioTime]) reproduces the scenario specified by "scenarioNumber". "scenarioNumber" is a URI (Universal Resource Identifier) indicating the location of a file describing the structure of the scenario. The method playPlayList(playListNumber) causes the playlist specified by "playPlayList" to be reproduced. The method playChapterMark(playListNumber, chapterNumber) reproduces a playlist specified by "playListNumber" from the chapter specified by "chapterNumber". The method playPlayItem(playListNumber, playListNumber) specifies a playlist from the play item specified by "playItemNumber" by "playListNumber". "playListNumber" is "playItem_id". When the value of "playItem_id" is designated as "0", playitems belonging to one playlist are reproduced from the beginning.
方法play(position)(object)将当前位置移动到一个邻近的播放列表或播放项目。参数“position”是“prev”、“next”、“top”、“goUp”和“tail”中的任一个。参数“object”描述了一个移动对象的移动方法(播放列表、播放项目或章节)。The method play(position)(object) moves the current position to an adjacent playlist or playitem. The parameter "position" is any one of "prev", "next", "top", "goUp", and "tail". The parameter "object" describes a move method to move an object (playlist, playitem or chapter).
方法stop()停止脚本的再现。在这种情况下,不保留标准寄存器的值。方法resume()从上一个停止位置重新开始再现。方法playSoundEffect()再现一个选择的效果声音。The method stop() stops the reproduction of the script. In this case, the values of the standard registers are not preserved. The method resume() resumes reproduction from the last stopped position. The method playSoundEffect() reproduces a selected effect sound.
接下来,将描述用于播放器状态的方法。在图30A、图30B、图30C、图30D中,方法getMenuDescriptionLanguage()得到所显示的菜单的语言。方法getScenarioNumber()、方法getPlayListNumber()和方法getChapterNumber()分别得到正在再现的一个脚本号、播放列表号和章节号。Next, methods for player state will be described. In Figure 30A, Figure 30B, Figure 30C, Figure 30D, the method getMenuDescriptionLanguage() gets the language of the displayed menu. The method getScenarioNumber( ), method getPlayListNumber( ) and method getChapterNumber( ) respectively obtain a scenario number, playlist number and chapter number being reproduced.
接下来,将描述用于视频流的方法。方法setVideoStreamNumber()描述了要解码的视频流。方法getVideoStreamNumber()、方法getVideoStreamStatus、方法getVideoStreamAttr()分别得到正在再现的视频流号、状态、和视频流的属性。视频流的属性是例如编码系统、分辨率、屏幕高宽比、在屏幕高宽比为4∶3的情况下的显示模式,以及显示/隐藏关闭的字幕。方法setAngleNumber()描述了角度编号;方法setAngleNumber()得到一个已选择的角度编号。方法getMaxVideoStream()得到视频流的最大数量。Next, a method for video streaming will be described. The method setVideoStreamNumber() describes the video stream to be decoded. The method getVideoStreamNumber(), method getVideoStreamStatus, and method getVideoStreamAttr() respectively obtain the video stream number, status, and attributes of the video stream being reproduced. Attributes of the video stream are, for example, encoding system, resolution, aspect ratio, display mode in the case of an aspect ratio of 4:3, and display/hiding of closed captions. The method setAngleNumber() describes the angle number; the method setAngleNumber() gets a selected angle number. The method getMaxVideoStream() gets the maximum number of video streams.
接下来,将描述音频流。方法getAudioStreamAvailability()得到一个信息,该信息描述是否要获得所包含的指定音频流。方法getAudioStreamLanguage()得到一个信息,该信息是有关于指定音频流的语言。方法setAudioStreamStatus()得到指定音频流的状态。方法getsetAudioStreamStatus()指定所指定的音频流的状态。音频流的状态可以是例如是否要再现。方法setAudioStreamAttribute()得到指定音频流的属性。Next, the audio stream will be described. The method getAudioStreamAvailability() gets a message describing whether to obtain the specified audio stream included. The method getAudioStreamLanguage() gets information about the language of the specified audio stream. The method setAudioStreamStatus() gets the status of the specified audio stream. The method getsetAudioStreamStatus() specifies the status of the specified audio stream. The status of an audio stream can be, for example, whether to reproduce or not. The method setAudioStreamAttribute() gets the attributes of the specified audio stream.
接下来,将描述用于子画面流(字幕数据)的方法。方法getSPStreamAvailability()得到一个信息,该信息描述了是否包括一个指定的子画面流。方法getSPStreamLanguage()得到在指定子画面流中使用的语言。方法getSPDisplayStatus()得到子画面流的显示状态。方法setSPDisplayStatus()描述了子画面流的显示状态。子画面流的显示状态是例如是否显示子画面流等。方法getSPStreamAttribute()是到指定的子画面流的属性。子画面流的属性是例如是以纵横比为4∶3还是以宽屏幕来显示子画面流。Next, a method for a sub-picture stream (subtitle data) will be described. The method getSPStreamAvailability() gets an information describing whether a specified sprite stream is included. The method getSPStreamLanguage() gets the language used in the specified sprite stream. The method getSPDisplayStatus() gets the display status of the sub-picture stream. The method setSPDisplayStatus() describes the display status of the sub-picture stream. The display state of the sub screen stream is, for example, whether to display the sub screen stream or the like. The method getSPStreamAttribute() is to specify the attribute of the sprite stream. The attribute of the sub-picture stream is, for example, whether the sub-picture stream is displayed in an aspect ratio of 4:3 or in a wide screen.
接下来,将描述用于公用参数32的方法。在图31A、图31B、图31C、图31D中,用于公用参数32的方法表示为用于寄存器读/写的方法。方法clearReg()初始化BD虚拟播放器30存储区域的所有寄存器。方法segReg()设置指定的寄存器的一个值。方法getReg()从指定的寄存器中读出一个值。Next, a method for the
接下来,将描述用于计时器的方法。方法sleep()使进程在指定时间停止。方法setTimeout()在指定时间过去后执行一个功能或进程。方法setInterval()在指定的时间间隔执行一个进程。计时器的方法可以以毫秒为单元来指定。方法clearTimer()停止一个具有指定记录计时器的进程。方法pauseTimer()暂时停止一个具有指定记录ID的计时器。方法resumeTimer()使一个具有指定记录ID的计时器从暂停状态重新开始计时。Next, the method for the timer will be described. The method sleep() causes the process to stop at the specified time. The method setTimeout() executes a function or process after the specified time has elapsed. The method setInterval() executes a process at the specified time interval. Timer methods can be specified in milliseconds. The method clearTimer() stops a process with the specified record timer. The method pauseTimer() temporarily stops a timer with the specified record ID. The method resumeTimer() restarts a timer with the specified record ID from the paused state.
作为用于键盘输入的方法,方法getPressedKey()得到输入(按下)的一个键的类型。As a method for keyboard input, the method getPressedKey( ) gets the type of a key input (pressed).
接下来,将描述用于图形的方法。方法loadGraphics(htmlfile,ID)阅读一个由“htmlfile”指定的文件,并且在非显示状态下将该文件扩展到图形平面12。“ID”指定到一个扩展的图形图像,并且被一个方法引用,该方法将在后面描述。方法showGraphics(ID)显示一个由上述方法装载图形(htmlfile,ID)扩展到图形平面12的图像。方法hideGraphics(ID)隐藏由“ID”指定的图像。Next, a method for graphics will be described. The method loadGraphics(htmlfile, ID) reads a file specified by "htmlfile" and expands the file to
接下来,将描述其它方法。方法random(输入数字num)生成从1到“num”的随机数。随机数是由唯一的定义生成的。方法catchEvent(eventname,eventhandler)在当由“eventname”指定的事件发生时,执行“eventhandler”指定的功能。Next, other methods will be described. The method random(input number num) generates a random number from 1 to "num". Random numbers are generated by unique definitions. The method catchEvent(eventname, eventhandler) executes the function specified by "eventhandler" when the event specified by "eventname" occurs.
2-6.关于命令的执行2-6. Execution of commands
接下来,将从实际上描述PBC程序40。在发明的第一模式中,为一个脚本创建一个脚本文件。当在图形平面12上显示菜单屏幕60时,为一个屏幕创建一个HTML文件。脚本文件和HTML文件分别有扩展名“js”和“html”。这些扩展名分辨了文件的两种类型。脚本程序的文件有固定的文件名,例如“starup.js”,当一个光盘装入驱动装置时,开始执行该文件。Next, the
接下来,作为一个例子,将考虑具有图32所示的脚本结构的光盘。该光盘具有两个脚本Scenario000和Scenario001。该脚本Scenario000显示菜单屏幕91,菜单屏幕91具有一个到脚本Scenario001的链接按键。当光盘装入再现装置时,显示菜单屏幕91。当点击菜单屏幕91上的按键92时,再现脚本Scenario001。再现脚本Scenario001后,再次显示菜单屏幕91。Next, as an example, an optical disk having a script structure shown in FIG. 32 will be considered. This disc has two scenarios Scenario000 and Scenario001. The script Scenario000 displays a
图33示出了图32所示的结构所必需的文件列表的一个例子。在这个例子中,需要六个文件:文件“startup.js”、文件“Scenario000.js”、文件“000.html”、文件“00000.rpls”、文件“Scenario001.js”、文件“00001.rpsi”。Fig. 33 shows an example of a file list necessary for the structure shown in Fig. 32 . In this example, six files are required: file "startup.js", file "Scenario000.js", file "000.html", file "00000.rpls", file "Scenario001.js", file "00001.rpsi ".
在这些文件中,文件“Scenario000.js”是描述了脚本Scenario000的结构信息的脚本文件。文件“Scenario000.js”描述了菜单屏幕91的结构信息,也就是脚本列表屏幕。文件“000.html”是描述了菜单屏幕91的版面信息的HTML文件。文件“00000.rpls”是作为菜单屏幕91的背景而显示的播放列表文件。文件“Scenario001.js”是描述了脚本Scenario001的结构信息的脚本文件。文件“00001.rpls”是一个播放列表文件,其描述了根据脚本Scenario001而再现的播放列表的信息。Among these files, the file "Scenario000.js" is a script file describing the structural information of the scenario Scenario000. The file "Scenario000.js" describes the structural information of the
在图33中,省略了根据播放列表文件00000.rpls”和00001.rpls”而再现的内容文件(点击信息文件“%%%%%.clip”和AV流文件“*****.m2ts”)。In FIG. 33, the content files reproduced based on the playlist files 00000.rpls" and 00001.rpls" (the click information file "%%%%%.clip" and the AV stream file "*****.m2ts") are omitted. ").
图33所示的每个文件,都根据图34所示的目录结构,记录在光盘上。Each file shown in FIG. 33 is recorded on the optical disc according to the directory structure shown in FIG. 34 .
图35到图38示出了脚本文件和HTML文件描述的实际例子。图35是文件“startup.js”的描述的例子。文件“startup.js”确定脚本的数量和其记录在光盘上的名字。方法playScenario(“scenario000”)访问文件“scenario000.js”,并且再现脚本Scenario000。当再现脚本Scenario000时,显示菜单屏幕91。35 to 38 show actual examples of script files and HTML file descriptions. Fig. 35 is an example of description of the file "startup.js". The file "startup.js" determines the number of scripts and their names recorded on the disc. The method playScenario("scenario000") accesses the file "scenario000.js" and reproduces the scenario Scenario000. When the scenario Scenario000 is reproduced, the
图36是文件“scenario000.js”的描述的例子。当用“on”(见图28)确定一个功能并且描述了方法catchEvent()的一个事件发生时,执行在该功能中确定的内容。在图36所示的例子中,指定HTML文件“000.html”,其描述了菜单屏幕91的版面信息。控制阅读定时和菜单屏幕91显示到图形平面12的显示定时。此外,方法playPlayList(“00000.rpls”)再现播放列表“00000.rpls”.Fig. 36 is an example of description of the file "scenario000.js". When a function is determined with "on" (see FIG. 28) and an event describing the method catchEvent() occurs, the content determined in the function is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the HTML file "000.html" describing the layout information of the
换句话说,文件“scenario000.js”使播放列表“00000.rpls”的影片显示在影片平面10上。此外,在显示播放列表“00000.rpls”时,文件“scenario000.js”在检测到标志的时候将菜单屏幕91显示在图形平面12上。In other words, the file “scenario000.js” causes the movies of the playlist “00000.rpls” to be displayed on the
图37是文件“000.html”的描述的例子。在由标记<style type=“text/css”>和</style>包围的部分中,描述了用于“menu”和“scenario000”引用的图像的显示屏幕91中的版面信息。在图37所示的例子中,用屏幕上的绝对坐标描述版面信息。用图像名“menu”引用的图像数据显示为一个宽200像素、高50像素的图像,其位置在从屏幕上部起200像素和屏幕左端起800像素处。类似地,图像名“scenario”引用的图像数据显示为宽400像素、高100像素的图像,其位置在从屏幕上部起700像素和屏幕左端起700像素处。Fig. 37 is an example of description of the file "000.html". In a portion surrounded by tags <style type="text/css"> and </style>, layout information in the
在标记<script type=“text/javascript”>和</script>包围的部分中,确定用于鼠标操作的每个事件句柄onMoverhander(f)、onMounthander(f)、onMclickhander(f)。在图37所示的例子中,作为按键图像的图像数据“201.png”、“200.png”、“202.png”与事件句柄onMoverhander(f)、onMounthander(f)、onMclickhander(f)相关联。此外,事件句柄onMclickhander(f)再现脚本文件“scenario001.js”。In the part surrounded by tags <script type="text/javascript"> and </script>, each event handler onMoverhander(f), onMounthander(f), onMclickhander(f) for mouse operation is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 37, the image data "201.png", "200.png", and "202.png" which are button images are associated with event handlers onMoverhander(f), onMounthander(f), onMclickhander(f) couplet. Also, the event handler onMclickhander(f) reproduces the script file "scenario001.js".
在标记<body>和</body>包围的部分中,描述了菜单屏幕91的图形平面12上的图像数据。描述了图像数据的文件名(“100.png”、“200.png”),其对应于由标记<style type=“text/css”>和</style>所包围的部分中的所描述的图像名。当根据例如一个鼠标等点击装置的操作,发生用于由图像名“scenario000”引用的图像数据事件onMover、onMount和onclick时,分别执行事件句柄onMoverhander(f)、onMounthander(f)、onMclickhander(f)。In a portion surrounded by tags <body> and </body>, image data on the
事件onMouseover是当游标位于指定的区域时发生的。事件onMouseout是当游标从指定区域离开时发生的。事件onclick是当发生预定操作同时游标位于指定区域时发生的,该预定操作可以是鼠标等点击装置的点击操作。The event onMouseover occurs when the cursor is in the specified area. The event onMouseout occurs when the cursor leaves the specified area. The event onclick occurs when a predetermined operation occurs and the cursor is located in a specified area, and the predetermined operation may be a click operation of a pointing device such as a mouse.
图38是文件“scenario001.js”的描述的例子。功能UOPControl()确定了当脚本文件“scenario001.js”正在再现时的操作。如果按下了远程控制菜单键,再现用于显示菜单屏幕91的脚本Scenario000。功能playListEnded()确定一个当脚本文件“scenario001.js”的播放列表已再现时的操作,再现用于显示菜单屏幕91的脚本scenario000。脚本文件“scenario001.js”再现播放列表“00001.rpls”。Fig. 38 is an example of description of the file "scenario001.js". The function UOPControl() determines the operation when the script file "scenario001.js" is being reproduced. If the remote control menu key is pressed, the scenario Scenario000 for displaying the
接下来,将描述图35到图38所示的操作。当光盘装入再现装置时,从光盘阅读文件“startup.js”。从文件“startup.js”访问文件“scenario000.js”。在执行文件“scenario000.js”中描述的脚本“scenario000”时,根据图36所示的脚本,在影片平面10上显示播放列表“00000.rpls”的影片。Next, the operations shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 will be described. When the disc is loaded into the playback device, the file "startup.js" is read from the disc. Access the file "scenario000.js" from the file "startup.js". When the script "scenario000" described in the file "scenario000.js" is executed, the movies of the playlist "00000.rpls" are displayed on the
根据播放列表“00000.rpls”中描述的标志所相应的时间,访问文件“000.html”。根据文件“000.html”的描述,显示脚本表格的菜单屏幕91在图形平面12上展开,并且显示。菜单屏幕91还包括一个脚本“scenario000”。The file "000.html" is accessed according to the time corresponding to the mark described in the playlist "00000.rpls". According to the description of the file "000.html", a
在菜单屏幕91上,有例如“Menu”等字符串的图像文件“100.png”,以及例如“Scenario001”等字符串的图像文件“200.png”。上述图像文件位于图形平面12,并且显示了上述字符串。在显示为图形平面12的背景的影片平面10中,显示了播放列表“00000.rpls”的影片。影片平面10上的播放列表“00000.rpls”的影片和图形平面12上的文件“000.html”的菜单屏幕91重叠并显示在相同的屏幕上。结果,菜单屏幕91和影片背景一起显示。On the
在这里,预定的不透明度指定给图形平面12的一个屏幕(菜单屏幕91)。菜单屏幕91可以透明地显示在影片平面10的影片上。在这个例子中,在播放列表“00000.rpls”的开始和结束处描述了标志。当播放列表“00000.rpls”再现时,显示菜单屏幕91。在再现播放列表“00000.rpls”后,清除菜单屏幕91。Here, a predetermined opacity is assigned to one screen of the graphics plane 12 (menu screen 91). The
在菜单屏幕91上,显示一个游标,其可以由用户的远程控制器的键操作所移动。当游标与图像文件“200.png”重叠时,文件“000.html”所确定的事件Mouseover发生。当事件Mouseover发生时,执行相应于事件onMouseover的事件句柄onMovehandler(),以表示聚焦在图像文件“200.png”的状态。当执行句柄onMovehandler()时,用图像文件“201.png”代替图像文件“200.png”。图像文件“201.png”是按键图像或类似图像,其颜色与图像文件“200.png”不同。On the
当游标位于图像文件“201.png”时,如果用户用远程控制命令器的预定键执行了点击操作,执行相应于该事件onclick的事件句柄onMovehandler()。结果,用图像文件“202.png”代替图像文件“201.png”,表示已选择图像文件“201.png”的状态。图像文件“202.png”是按键图像,其虚拟地表示已按下一个按键的状态。When the cursor is located at the image file "201.png", if the user performs a click operation with a predetermined key of the remote control commander, an event handler onMovehandler( ) corresponding to the event onclick is executed. As a result, the image file "201.png" is replaced by the image file "202.png", indicating the state that the image file "201.png" has been selected. The image file "202.png" is a key image that virtually represents a state that a key has been pressed.
当在文件“000.html”中描述了相应于事件“focused”和“clicked”的事件句柄时,就完成了一个具有交互功能的菜单屏幕,该功能响应用户的输入。When the event handlers corresponding to the events "focused" and "clicked" are described in the file "000.html", a menu screen with an interactive function that responds to the user's input is completed.
当点击菜单屏幕91上的按键图像“Scenario0001”时,执行用于脚本“Scenario0001”的再现程序。当执行文件“scenario001.js”时,再现脚本“scenario001”。如图38所示,访问文件“Scenario001”中描述的方法playPlayList(“0001.rpls”)。结果,再现播放列表“00001.rpls”。When the button image "Scenario0001" on the
再现播放列表“00001.rpls”后,发生一个播放列表再现结束事件PlayListEnded()。相应于该事件的事件句柄playScenario(scenario000.js)再现脚本“scenario000.js”。在这个例子中,再现脚本“Scenario001”之后,再次显示菜单屏幕91。After the playlist "00001.rpls" is reproduced, a playlist reproduction end event PlayListEnded() is generated. The event handler playScenario(scenario000.js) corresponding to this event reproduces the scenario "scenario000.js". In this example, after the scenario "Scenario001" is reproduced, the
当再现脚本“Scenario001”之后,即使操作了由“keyID”指定的键,再现脚本“scenario000.js”,并且显示菜单屏幕91。After the scenario "Scenario001" is reproduced, even if the key specified by "keyID" is operated, the scenario "scenario000.js" is reproduced, and the
图35到图38所示的HTML和ECMA脚本的描述只是例子。换句话说,当前发明不限于上述的例子。HTML和ECMA脚本在它们的描述中有灵活度。因而,即使部分地改变了HTML和ECMA脚本,也可以完成类似的操作。The descriptions of HTML and ECMA script shown in Fig. 35 to Fig. 38 are just examples. In other words, the current invention is not limited to the examples described above. HTML and ECMA script have flexibility in their description. Thus, similar operations can be accomplished even if HTML and ECMA scripts are partially changed.
2-7解码器模型2-7 Decoder Model
图39示出了根据本发明第一实施例的播放器解码器100的结构的例子。播放器解码器100解译从装进驱动装置(未示出)的光盘所复制来的数据,输出一个AV流,并且允许用户交互地操作该输出的AV流。FIG. 39 shows an example of the structure of the
CPU(中央处理器)(未示出)控制操作器解码器100的所有操作。CPU监视并控制播放器解码器100的独立部分的流和数据流。A CPU (Central Processing Unit) (not shown) controls all operations of the
当光盘装入驱动装置(未示出)时,如上所述,再现文件“startup.js”。根据文件“startup.js”的描述,阅读一个脚本文件。根据该脚本文件的描述,从光盘中读出一个HTML文件、显示在影片平面10上的影片数据、显示在字幕平面11和图形平面12上的图像数据、前述脚本文件所访问的另一个脚本文件,以及声音数据。When the disc is loaded into a drive device (not shown), the file "startup.js" is reproduced as described above. Read a script file as described in the file "startup.js". According to the description of the script file, an HTML file, the movie data displayed on the
在上面的描述中,在从光盘中读出的数据中,例如影片数据的流、子画面(字幕数据)和声音数据称为实时流,上述数据需要被连续地处理。相反,非实时数据例如脚本文件、HTML文件、图像数据文件和播放列表文件称为储存对象,上述数据不需要被连续处理。储存对象存储在存储器或类似装置中,并且在其中被扩展。当需要时,处理储存对象。In the above description, among the data read out from the optical disc, such as streams of movie data, sub-picture (subtitle data) and sound data are called real-time streams, which need to be processed continuously. In contrast, non-real-time data such as script files, HTML files, image data files, and playlist files are called storage objects, which need not be processed continuously. Storage objects are stored in memory or the like, and are expanded therein. Dispose of storage objects when needed.
播放器解码器100具有输入通道为通道(1)和通道(2)的两个系统。储存对象输入到通道(1)的输入端101。实时流输入到输入通道(2)的输入通道202。可选地,储存对象可以输入到输入端202。根据本发明的第一模式,实时流和部分储存对象输入到输入端202,例如MPEG2TS。The
输入到输入通道202的实时流不限于MPEG2TS。只要实时流可以以包为单位传送,并且与视频数据、音频数据、静止画面数据等多路复用,就可以输入另一种格式的流。在这里,将在后面描述的PID滤波器110用作分离信号电路,其分离视频数据、音频数据、静止画面数据等。The real-time stream input to the
当驱动装置中光盘的旋转速度增加了例如两倍时,光盘的阅读传送速度就增加了,以时间分割基础,从光盘执行通道(1)和(2)驱动装置的两个系统的阅读操作。When the rotational speed of the optical disc in the drive is increased, for example, by a factor of two, the read transfer speed of the optical disc is increased, on a time-division basis, from the optical disc to perform two-system read operations of the channel (1) and (2) drives.
首先,将描述输入通道(1)的系统。输入通道(1)的一个储存对象被输入到开关电路102。当输入作为储存对象的ECMA脚本、HTML文件等的程序码时,开关电路102选择输出端102A。输入程序码存储在码缓冲器104。First, the system of the input channel (1) will be described. A storage object of the input channel (1) is input to the
当输入作为储存对象的图像数据时,开关电路102选择输出端102B。结果,该输入图像数据输入到开关电路103。当输入到输入端202的实时流不包括显示在字幕平面11或图形平面12的图像数据时,开关电路103选择输入端103A。从开关电路102输入的图像数据存储在内容缓冲器105中。When image data to be stored is input, the
类似,当显示在字幕平面11或图形平面12的图像数据包括在输入到端202的实时流中时,开关电路103选择输入端103B。结果,图像数据存储在内容缓冲器105中。当有需要时读出存储在码缓冲器104和内容缓冲器105中的储存对象,并提供给多介质引擎106。Similarly, when image data displayed on the
存储在内容缓冲器105中的储存对象的图像数据通过开关电路107和108,也分别提供给子画面解码器116和静止画面解码器117。Image data to be stored stored in the
多介质引擎106包括XML剖析器(parser)106A、脚本翻译机106B和图形翻译机106C。多介质引擎106可以由独立的硬件组成。可选地,多介质引擎106可以由CPU(未示出)执行的预定程序的处理实现。The
XML剖析器106A有剖析XML(可扩展标记语言)文档的功能。此外,XML剖析器106A还可以剖析HTML语言。由XML剖析器106A剖析过的HTML文档转换成了播放器解码器100可以执行的格式。脚本翻译机106B分析一个ECMA脚本,并将其转换成播放器解码器100可以执行的格式。图形翻译机106C对图像数据进行解码,得到可以在字幕平面11和图形平面12上展开的格式。The
多介质引擎106用缓冲器109的工作存储器执行XML剖析器106A、脚本翻译机106B和图形翻译机106C的处理。例如,XML剖析器106A、脚本翻译机106B使用缓冲器109的码缓冲器109a。图形翻译机106C使用缓冲器109的图形缓冲器109D。缓冲器109进一步包括字体缓冲器109B,其中存储字体数据,用于显示字符串,还包括树缓冲器109C,其中以分级树结构存储XML剖析器106A对HTML文档的解析结果。The
多介质引擎106从码缓冲器104读出例如ECMA脚本。当有需要时,根据该ECMA脚本的描述,多介质引擎106从码缓冲器104中读出另一个ECMA脚本和HTML文档,并且从内容缓冲器105中读出图像数据。存储在码缓冲器104和内容缓冲器105中的数据可以存储在码缓冲器104和内容缓冲器105中,直到不再需要这些数据。因而,当需要时,可以重复地读出存储在码缓冲器104和内容缓冲器105中的数据。The
此外,多介质引擎106为多种类型的输入数据、JAVAvm(Java(已登记商标)虚拟机器)功能等执行分离处理。而且,多介质引擎106从远程控制命令器、点击装置等接收用户的输入,并且根据用户的输入执行一个处理。用户的输入提供给子画面解码器116、静止画面解码器117和音频解码器118、MPGE视频解码器120、系统解码器121,这些将在后面描述。Furthermore, the
图形翻译机106C处理的图像数据通过开关电路130和131,分别提供给子画面平面132和静止画面平面134。此外,图像数据提供给图形现磁133和M/S转换平面136。在这个例子中,假定提供给子画面平面132和静止画面平面134的图像数据有PNG格式。多介质引擎106控制图像数据提供给面132、133、134和135的时间。M/S转换平面136控制开关电路137。开关电路137选择从静止画面平面134(将在后面描述)输出的静止画面数据,以及从影片平面135输出的影片数据,并且将选择的数据提供给下游阶段。The image data processed by
子画面平面132和图形平面133分别对应于前述字幕平面11和图形平面12。静止画面平面134和/或影片平面135对应于上述影片平面10。每个子画面平面132、图形平面133、静止平面134.影片平面135是由例如帧存储器组成的。The
多介质引擎106还提供控制信号,其使得静止平面134.影片平面135.子画面平面132和图形平面133被选择到表示处理器139,其将在后面描述。类似地,多介质引擎106提供一个控制信号,其控制音频流在表示处理器141的输出,这将在后面描述。The
接下来,将描述输入通道(2)的系统。作为MPEG2TS输入到输入端202的实时流提供给PID滤波器110。PID滤波器110从MPEG2TS传送流提取PID(包识别),并检测包括在传送包中的流的属性。PID滤波器110根据流的属性为每个传送包将输入实时流分入相应的系统。Next, the system of the input channel (2) will be described. The real-time stream input to the
当传送包包括了储存对象的图像数据时,该传送包临时存储在缓冲器TBn 111A。在预定时间读出该传送包,并通过已选择的输入端103B,输入开关电路103。此后,通过开关电路103,将该传送包存储在内容缓冲器105中。When a transfer packet includes image data of a storage target, the transfer packet is temporarily stored in the
当PID滤波器110已确定传送包包括子画面数据,也就是字幕数据时,根据PID,该传送包临时存储在缓冲器TBn 111B和缓冲器Bn 112B中。传送包是在预定时间读出,并且通过已选择的输入端107B,输入开关电路107。通过开关电路107,传送包提供给子画面解码器116。When the
子画面解码器116从提交的传送包消除标题信息,对包括在传送包中的字幕数据进行解码,并且得到用于字幕的图像数据。该图像数据输入到开关电路130的输入端130B,并且通过开关电路130扩展到子画面平面132。The
当PID滤波器110根据PID确定传送包具有画面数据时,传送包临时存储在缓冲TBn 111C和缓冲器Bn 112C中。传送包在预定时间读出,并且通过已选择的端108B,输入到开关电路108。该传送包通过开关电路108,提供给静止画面解码器117。When the
静止画面解码器117从提交的传送包消除标题信息,对包括在传送包中的静止画面数据进行解码,并且得到静止画面数据。该静止画面数据在预定时间输入到开关电路131的输入端131B,并且通过开关电路131扩展到静止画面平面134。The still picture
当PID滤波器110根据PID确定传送包具有音频数据时,传送包临时存储在缓冲TBn 111D和缓冲器Bn 112D中。传送包在预定时间读出,并且提供给音频解码器118。包括在传送包中的音频数据是根据例如基于MPEG的系统而压缩编码的。When the
音频解码器118还具有例如线性PCM(脉码调制)音频解码器119。音频解码器118从输入的传送流中消除标题信息,对包括在传送包中的压缩编码音频数据进行解码,并且得到线性PCM音频数据。The
线性PCM音频数据由音频解码器118中输出,并输入到用于音频的表示处理器141。在表示处理器141中,在多介质引擎106的控制下,将一个声音效果添加到线性PCM音频数据,并且从输出端142得到该数据。The linear PCM audio data is output from the
当PID滤波器110根据PID确定传送包包括影片数据时,传送包临时存储在缓冲器TBn 111E、缓冲器MBn 113和缓冲器EBn114中,在预定时间读出传送包,将其提供给MPEG视频解码器120。对包括在传送包中的影片数据根据MPEG2系统进行压缩编码。When the
MPEG视频解码器120从提交的传送包中消除标题信息,对根据MPEG2系统压缩编码的影片数据进行解码,得到基带影片数据。The
从MPEG视频解码器120输出的影片数据输入到开关电路124的输入端124A。此外,影片数据通过缓冲器123输入到开关电路124的输入端124B。在开关电路124中,在预定时间选择输入端124A和124B。输出的影片数据在影片平面135上展开。The film data output from the
当PID滤波器110根据PID确定传送包包括系统信息时,通过缓冲器TBn111F和Bsys115,传送包提供给系统解码器121。系统解码器121从提交的传送包中消除标题信息,并且从中提取系统信息。该系统信息提供给例如CPU(未示出)。When the
子画面平面132中的图像数据提供给调色板150,其对应于上述的调色板22。该调色板有256色。调色板涉及到一个索引。输出YCbCr数据。此外,提取不透明度数据α1。YCbCr数据和不透明度数据α1提供给表示处理器139。The image data in the
图形平面133上的图像数据提供给RGB/YCbCr开关电路151,其对应于RGB/YCbCr开关电路26。RGB/YCbCr转换电路151将颜色系统从RGB(4:4:4)转换到YCbCr(4:4:4)。将从RGB/YCbCr转换电路151输出的YCbCr数据提供给表示处理器139。此外,从图形平面133上的图像数据中提取不透明度数据α2。所提取的不透明度数据提供给表示处理器139。Image data on the
静止画面平面134上的图像数据输入到输入端137A。此外,影片平面135上的影片数据是输入到开关电路137的输入端137B。静止画面平面134上的图像数据或影片平面135上的影片数据是由M/S转换平面136上的开关电路137所选择的。换句话说,像影片平面135一样处理静止平面134。开关电路137的输出通过上/下转换器138提供给表示处理器139。Image data on the
上/下转换器138是转换图像分辨率的电路。例如上/下转换器138将具有高分辨率的高清晰度(HD)图像转换成具有标准分辨率的标准清晰度(SD)图像。The up/down
表示处理器139使用图22所示的字幕平面11(子画面平面132)的图像数据的不透明度α1和图形平面12(图形平面133)的不透明度α2,执行一个α混合处理。The
换句话说,表示处理器139根据已设置到子画面平面132的图像数据的不透明度α1,将开关电路137已选择的静止画面平面134或影片平面135的图像数据与子画面平面132的图像数据组合。此外,表示处理器139根据已设置到图形平面133中的图像数据中的不透明度α2,组合一个图像和图形平面133的图像数据,上述第一个图像数据是由静止画面平面134或影片平面135以及子画面平面132所组合的。从输出端140得到一个图像数据,该数据是由图形平面133的图像数据、子画面平面132的图像数据(字幕数据)、静止画面平面134的图像数据或影片平面135的图像数据组合得到的。In other words, the
表示处理器139可以在实时基础上为图像数据执行一个效果处理。The
上述描述中,播放器解码器100的各部分是由硬件组成的。然而,本发明并不限于该例子。例如,播放器解码器100可以由软件的处理来实现。在这种情况下,播放器解码器100可以在一台计算机装置上实现。可选地,解码器100可以由硬件和软件的组合来实现。例如,音频解码器118和MPEG视频解码器120可以由硬件组成。播放器解码器100的其它部分可以由软件组成。In the above description, each part of the
一个程序,可以使得一个计算机装置执行播放器解码器100,播放器解码器100可以仅由软件组成,或者由硬件和软件的组合组成,该程序记录在例如光盘只读存储器(CD-ROM)等记录介质上,并且与其一起提供。CD-ROM装入计算机装置的CD-ROM驱动器。记录在CD-ROM上的程序装载入该计算机装置。结果,上述处理可以在计算机装置上执行。由于该计算机装置的结构是公知的,因此省略了对其的描述。A program can make a computer device execute the
2-8用户界面2-8 User Interface
接下来,将描述根据本发明一个实施例的用户界面。图40示出了显示在图形平面12上的按键的状态改变的例子。有两个按键显示状态:在屏幕上显示了一个按键的按键显示状态,以及在屏幕上没有显示按键的按键非显示状态。按键非显示状态改变到按键显示状态。在清除该按键后,按键显示状态改变到按键非显示状态。按键显示状态进一步包括三个状态:正常状态、选择状态和执行状态。按键显示状态可以在这三个状态中改变。按键显示状态可以在这三个状态中的一个方向改变。Next, a user interface according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 40 shows an example of state change of keys displayed on the
接下来,参照图25,详细描述按键显示状态的状态改变。当光盘装入播放器或当用户按下远程控制器的菜单键时,显示菜单屏幕60。显示菜单状态60的时候,按键62A、62B、62C、63D、64和65从非显示状态改变到状态。通常,按键62A、62B、62C、63D、64和65中的一个已处于选择状态。现在,假定按键62A已处于选择状态,其它按键处于正常状态。Next, referring to FIG. 25 , the state change of the key display state will be described in detail. The menu screen 60 is displayed when a disc is loaded into the player or when the user presses the menu key of the remote controller. While the menu state 60 is displayed, the keys 62A, 62B, 62C, 63D, 64 and 65 change from the non-display state to the state. Typically, one of the keys 62A, 62B, 62C, 63D, 64 and 65 is already selected. Now, assume that the key 62A is already in the selected state, and the other keys are in the normal state.
当用户操作例如远程控制器的箭头键,按键中的一个(例如,按键62A)从正常状态改变到选择状态。此外,按键62A从选择状态变到正常状态。游标已根据用户操作而移动。当用户操作远程控制器的OK键时,按键62B从选择状态改变到执行状态。结果,执行按键62B指定的一个播放器操作。When the user operates, for example, the arrow keys of the remote controller, one of the keys (eg, key 62A) changes from a normal state to a selected state. In addition, the key 62A changes from the selected state to the normal state. The cursor has moved based on user action. When the user operates the OK key of the remote controller, the key 62B changes from the selection state to the execution state. As a result, a player operation designated by the key 62B is performed.
如上所述,播放器操作在编程语言或例如ECMA脚本等脚本语言中作出了描述。播放器操作的程序和脚本记录在光盘中。播放器操作的程序和脚本可以作为独立的文件记录在光盘上。可选地,图形对象、播放器操作的程序和脚本可以与片断AV流文件多路复用,正如将在后面描述的图形对象。As mentioned above, player operations are described in a programming language or scripting language such as ECMA script. Programs and scripts for player operations are recorded on the disc. Programs and scripts for player operations can be recorded on the disc as separate files. Alternatively, graphic objects, programs and scripts operated by the player may be multiplexed with clip AV stream files, as will be described later for graphic objects.
2-9.关于数据结构2-9. About data structure
接下来,将与图像数据一起,描述组成这样一个菜单屏幕和控制信息的按键的图像数据的数据结构。现在,将描述显示的字幕和图形(静止画面),它们不构成记录在光盘上的主要内容-影片。在后面的描述中,显示在屏幕上的例如字幕和图形等元素被看作对象。对象的类型分为三种,即字幕、同步图形和非同步图形,如图41所示。Next, together with the image data, the data structure of image data of keys constituting such a menu screen and control information will be described. Now, subtitles and graphics (still pictures) displayed, which do not constitute the movie, which is the main content recorded on the optical disc, will be described. In the following description, elements such as subtitles and graphics displayed on the screen are regarded as objects. There are three types of objects, namely subtitles, synchronous graphics and asynchronous graphics, as shown in Figure 41.
字幕与影片显示,就像影片的字幕。字幕图像元素不与用户通过例如远程控制器的输入相关联。图形是例如菜单屏幕上的按键等图像元素,其可以接受用户的输入。此外,图形分成两类:同步图形和非同步图形。同步图形是与影片同步的图像元素。同步图形是例如分支选择屏幕,当内容主要部分再现时,其在特定时间显示。非同步图形是图像元素,其与正在再现的内容主要部分非同步地显示。非同步图形的例子是当光盘装入播放器时初始显示的菜单屏幕,还可以是根据用户的输入显示的屏幕。用Java应用程序显示的图像元素和根据浏览器软件上的HTML文件的描述而显示的图像元素是非同步图形,其中的Java应用程序在JavaVM上操作。Subtitles are displayed with the movie, just like subtitles for movies. The subtitle image element is not associated with user input through eg a remote controller. Graphics are image elements such as buttons on menu screens that accept user input. Furthermore, graphics are divided into two categories: synchronous graphics and asynchronous graphics. Sync graphics are graphic elements that are synchronized with the movie. The synchronous figure is, for example, a branch selection screen, which is displayed at a specific time when the main part of the content is reproduced. Asynchronous graphics are graphic elements that are displayed asynchronously with the main part of the content being rendered. Examples of asynchronous graphics are menu screens that are initially displayed when a disc is loaded into the player, but also screens that are displayed based on user input. The image element displayed by the Java application program and the image element displayed according to the description of the HTML file on the browser software are asynchronous graphics, where the Java application program operates on the JavaVM.
在显示在影片平面10上的每个图像元素和主画面的关系中,字幕和同步图形与主画面同步显示。因而,字幕和同步图形是同步类型的。另一方面,由于非同步图形与主画面非同步地显示,它们与其名字暗示的一样是非同步类型的。In the relationship between each image element displayed on the
字幕和图形可以根据平面分类。字幕显示在字幕平面11。同步和非同步图形显示在图形平面12。Subtitles and graphics can be classified according to plane. Subtitles are displayed on the
由于正在再现主要影片时显示字幕和同步图形,它们倾向于具有共用的数据结构。在下文中,具有共用数据结构的字幕和同步图形称为图形对象。由于图形对象总是与正在再现的影片同步地显示,当它们与影片多路复用时,可以容易地处理。Since subtitles and simultaneous graphics are being displayed while the main movie is being rendered, they tend to have a common data structure. Hereinafter, subtitles and sync graphics having a common data structure are referred to as graphics objects. Since graphics objects are always displayed synchronously with the movie being rendered, they can be easily handled when they are multiplexed with the movie.
图42A、图42B和图42C示出了根据本发明第一模式的图形对象200的数据结构的例子。如图42A所示,图形对象200是由三个区域组成的,它们是图形对象标题201、显示控制命令表格202和PNG数据区域203。42A, 42B and 42C show an example of the data structure of the
在下面的例子中,假定作为图形对象200的图像数据具有PNG格式,并且该图像数据是PNG图像数据。可选地,图形对象200可以是另一个格式的图像数据,例如具有JPEG格式的位映象数据,或根据运行长度压缩方法压缩了的图像数据,或没有压缩编码的位映象数据。为了简单起见,图像数据会表示为PNG图像、PNG图像数据等。In the following example, it is assumed that image data as the graphics object 200 has a PNG format, and that the image data is PNG image data. Alternatively, the
在图42A、图42B、图42C中,图形对象标题201描述了表示图形对象200的属性的信息。图形对象200的属性是例如图形对象200的数据尺寸、图形对象200具有的PNG图像的数量、图形对象200共用的用于PNG图像数据的调色板数据,以及用来识别图形对象200的识别信息。该识别信息是例如指定到每个图形对象200的号码。图形对象标题201可以进一步描述另一个信息。In FIG. 42A , FIG. 42B , and FIG. 42C , the
显示控制命令表格202描述了控制PNG图像显示必需的信息,例如显示图形对象200具有的PNG图像的位置,以及显示开始时间,以及显示其结束时间。The display control command table 202 describes information necessary to control the display of the PNG image, such as the position where the PNG image possessed by the
PNG数据区域203描述了根据PNG格式压缩编码的图像数据(在下文中,该图像数据称作PNG数据)。PNG数据区域203可以具有多个PNG数据203A、203B...,和203n。在PNG数据区域203中描述的PNG数据的号码,在图形对象标题201中有描述。The
假定在PNG数据区域203中描述的多个PNG数据203A、203B...,203n是有紧密联系的图像,就像一组组成了显示的按键的三个状态的动画或图像的一组若干静止画面那样。当上述PNG数据203A、203B,...,和203n组成一个图形对象时,PNG图像可以容易地处理。Assume that a plurality of
图形对象200具有时间信息,其描述了图像对象200可以显示的时间。例如一个实时流被作为MPGE2TS传送的例子中,在MPEG2(运动图象专家组2)中确定的pts(显示时间标记)用作时间信息。该pts是再现的一个输出的时间管理信息。该pts由90kHz的时间测量,作为具有33位长度的值。MPEG系统的相关解码器的STC(系统时钟)与pts一致时,再现并输出相关访问单元。图形对象200可以在pts所表示的时间之后显示。在pts所表示的时间之后,用显示控制命令控制图形对象200显示的开始和结束。由于图形对象200的显示是用显示控制命令管理的,在图形对象200的显示结束后,可以显示相同的图形对象200。The
图42B示出了字幕的图形对象200的一个例子。PNG数据区域203描述了作为PNG数据(1)203A-1的一个图像。当图形对象200是字幕时,该图形对象200只需要PNG数据(1)203A-1。例如淡入/淡出等特效并不改变通过添加显示控制命令而添加到例如字幕的一个图像的内容,这导致PNG数据(1)A-1的不透明度改变到显示控制命令表格202。FIG. 42B shows an example of a
另一方面,当例如图像改变的动画等特效应用到字幕时,相应于该动画的各个动作的若干PNG数据(2)B-1、PNG数据(3)C-1、PNG数据(4)D-1可以描述在一个图形对象200中,如图42B中虚线所示。此外,例如日文和英文等不同语言的字幕的PNG数据可以描述为一个图形对象200中的PNG数据(1)A-1、PNG数据(2)B-1...。On the other hand, when a special effect such as an animation of image change is applied to subtitles, several PNG data (2)B-1, PNG data (3)C-1, PNG data (4)D corresponding to the respective actions of the animation -1 can be described in a
图42C示出了组成一个按键的图形对象200的例子。如上所述,一个按键有正常状态、选择状态和执行状态三种类型的状态。一个按键可以用相应于上述三种类型的状态的不同图像显示。在使用相应于上述三种类型的状态的不同图像显示按键时,必须准备三个按键图像的数据。三个图像按键的数据处理为一个图形对象200。换句话说,图形对象200的PNG数据区域203描述PNG数据203A-2、203B-2和203C-3,上述PNG数据分别显示了正常状态、选择状态和执行状态的按键。FIG. 42C shows an example of
当图形对象200只具有图42B用实线表示的用于字幕的PNG数据203A-1时,图形对象200的控制命令表格202中描述用于PNG数据203A-1的显示控制命令。当图形对象200具有如图42C所示的若干PNG数据203A-2、203B-2和203C-2时,必需识别在用于若干PNG数据203A-2、203B-2和203C-2的显示控制命令表格202中描述的显示控制命令。When the graphics object 200 has only the
当图42C中所示的图形对象200的按键的起始状态指定为选择状态时,首先显示并位于PNG数据区域203的开始的按键图像不应是用于正常状态的PNG数据203A-2,而是用于选择状态的PNG数据203B-2。根据本发明的第一模式,显示控制在图形对象200之外执行。When the initial state of the button of the
应当由图形对象200的外部脚本程序指定每个按键的起始状态、显示开始和显示结束、每个按键的执行状态中执行的程序等,脚本程序可以是,例如,上述的ECMA脚本或Java脚本。当用户操作远程控制器的箭头键和移动游标时,改变显示的用于按键的PNG数据。在这种情况下,播放器根据用户的输入改变每个按键的PNG数据。Should be specified by the external script program of
根据本发明的第一模式,图形对象100划分成MPEG2中规定的包,与片断AV流多路复用,并且作为片断AV流文件记录在光盘上。如图43所示,图形对象200被划分并包括在PES(打包元素流)包210,210,...,这在MPEG2中有规定。在这里,图形对象标题201、显示控制命令表格202和各个PNG数据203A、203B...203n包含在各个PES包210,210,...的有效载荷的开始。结果,当再现图形对象200时,可以容易地搜索其每个数据。According to the first mode of the present invention, the graphics object 100 is divided into packets specified in MPEG2, multiplexed with a clip AV stream, and recorded on an optical disc as a clip AV stream file. As shown in FIG. 43, the graphics object 200 is divided and included in PES (Packed Elementary Stream) packets 210, 210, . . . , which are specified in MPEG2. Here, the graphics object
被划分并包括在PES(包元素流)包210,210,...的图形对象200进一步划分成TS包,TS包具有188直接的固定数据大小(未示出),并且与例如片断AV流等影片数据和声音数据流多路复用。The graphics object 200 that is divided and included in PES (packet element stream) packets 210, 210, ... is further divided into TS packets that have a fixed data size of 188 bytes (not shown), and are connected with, for example, clip AV streams Video data and audio data streams are multiplexed.
2-10关于用于图形对象的解码器模型2-10 About the decoder model for graphics objects
图44示出了解码图形对象200的图形对象解码器模型240的例子的功能框图。图形对象解码器模型240主要包括图39所示的播放器解码器100的多介质引擎106和子画面解码器116。在图44中,为了简单起见,与图39中相同的部分使用相同的标记,并省略了对它们的描述。由于图44比图39进一步功能性地示出了图形对象解码器模型240,在必要时,该图形对象解码器模型240的描述将与这些图所示的结构作比较。FIG. 44 shows a functional block diagram of an example of a graphical
片断AV流从端202提供给PID滤波器110。PID滤波器110的功能是作为MPEG TS(传送流)的信号分离器,根据TS的PID,从MPEG TS中提取影片数据、音频数据和图形图形对象200。影片数据提供给缓冲器TBn111E,其是视频缓冲器。音频数据提供给作为音频缓冲器的缓冲器111D。图形对象200是提供给缓冲器TBn 111B。其是图形对象的输入缓冲器(标记为图44中的“GOBJ”)。The clip AV stream is supplied from the terminal 202 to the
从缓冲器TBn 111B中读出图形对象200,并提供给GOBJ剖析器224。该GOBJ剖析器224是例如图39中所示的子画面解码器116的功能之一。GOBJ剖析器224从提交的图形对象信息200中读出图形对象标题201,从图形对象标题201中提取调色板数据,并且从图形对象标题201中分离显示控制命令表格202和PNG数据区域203。调色板数据和显示控制命令表格202提供给命令处理器/图形提取器225。PNG数据区域203的PNG数据203A、203B,...临时存储在PNG解码器缓冲器226中。PNG解码器缓冲器226相应于图39所示的缓冲器Bn112B。The graphics object 200 is read from the
存储在PNG解码器缓冲器226中的PNG数据203由PNG解码器227解码,该解码器是子解码器116的功能之一,并且将解码后的数据作为位映象数据输出。该位映象数据存储在对象缓冲器228。对象缓冲器228相应于图39所示的图形缓冲器109D。The
命令处理器/图形分割器225根据显示控制命令表格202描述的显示控制命令,读出存储在对象缓冲器228中的位映象数据,并且在指定时间将位映象数据传送到平面缓冲器229。平面缓冲器229相应于例如图39中的子画面平面132和图形平面133。平面缓冲器229A和229B(未示出)可以用于字幕和图形对象,而不仅是字幕。可选地,子画面平面132和图形平面133可以是与平面缓冲器229不同的区域。The command processor/
此外,命令处理器/图形分割器225提交来自GOBJ剖析器224的调色板数据到共用调色板表格230,其对应于图39所示的调色板150。命令处理器/图形分割器225具有多介质引擎106的一部分功能,以及图39所示的子画面解码器116的一部分功能。In addition, the command processor/
如上所述,当图形对象200包括一个按键时,图形对象200包括对应于该按键的三种类型的状态的PNG数据203A、203B和203C。PNG数据203A、203B和203C是由PNG解码器227解码,并且存储在对象缓冲器228中。As described above, when the
另一方面,例如来自用户的远程控制器的一个操作由命令处理器/图形分割器225接收。该命令处理器/图形分割器225根据用户的输入,从对象缓冲器228中读出一个位映象,并且将该位映象传送到平面缓冲器229。当用户的输入导致按键的状态从选择状态改变到执行状态时,选择性地从对象缓冲器228中读出相应于执行状态的按键图像,并且传送到平面缓冲器229。On the other hand, an operation such as from the user's remote controller is received by the command processor/
命令处理器/图形分割器225可以执行特效处理,例如用于位映象数据的提取处理,该处理是根据显示控制命令,从对象缓冲器228中读出的。Command processor/graphics slicer 225 may perform special effect processing, such as extraction processing for bitmap data, which is read from
根据本发明的第一模式,由于PNG数据的一个数据的采样深度是8位,在平面缓冲器229中安排每像素8位的数据。平面缓冲器229的数据是在显示系统的扫描周期的间隙读出,该显示系统执行例如显示装置等的显示处理。从平面缓冲器229读出的位映象数据提供给公用调色板表格230,该调色板表格相应于例如图39所示的调色板150。公用调色板表格230将位映象数据根据调色板索引值转换成真实RGB(4:4:4)的颜色信息,并且从位映象数据中提取不透明度数据α1和α2。RGB(4:4:4)的颜色信息转换成转换电路(未示出)YCbCr(4:4:4)的颜色信息。YCbCr(4:4:4)的颜色信息与不透明度数据α1和α2一起提供给图39所示的表示处理器139。According to the first mode of the present invention, since the sampling depth of one data of PNG data is 8 bits, data of 8 bits per pixel is arranged in the
需要改变调色板和不透明度的特殊效果,例如淡入/淡出是由命令处理器/图形分割器225完成的,其根据显示控制命令,改变公用调色板表格230中的数据。可选地,可以为字幕和图形对象200而不是字幕而安排公用调色板表格230A和230B(未示出)。Special effects that require changing the palette and opacity, such as fade in/out, are done by the command processor/
图45A、图45B、图45C和图45D示出了图形对象输入缓冲器、PNG解码器227、对象缓冲器228、平面缓冲器229(缓冲器TBn 111B,在下文中称为GOBJ输入缓冲器)的存储数据对象数量的改变的例子。PNG解码器227示出了当其解码PNG数据时,所使用缓冲器中存储的数据的数量。45A, FIG. 45B, FIG. 45C and FIG. 45D show graphics object input buffer,
图45A、图45B、图45C和图45D示出了在时基上三个图形对象GOBJ#1、GOBJ#2和GOBJ#3的数据数量的改变。用MPEG2系统的dts(解码时间标记)表示图形对象的解码开始时间。一个对象的有效周期的开始时间用pts表示。一个对象在图形对象标题201描述的时间presentation_end结束。显示控制命令指示有效周期中一个图像的显示开始和结束。45A, 45B, 45C, and 45D show changes in data amounts of three graphic
在图45D中,图形对象GOBJ#1的PNG数据输入到GOBJ输入缓冲器。在GOBJ#1的时间dts,开始PNG数据的解码。在图45C中,PNG数据从GOBJ输入缓冲器传送到PNG解码器227。解码该PNG数据并得到位映象数据。实际上,该PNG数据是临时地从GOBJ输入缓冲器移动到PNG解码器缓冲器226。PNG解码器227对存储在PNG解码器缓冲器226中的数据执行解码处理。In FIG. 45D, the PNG data of the graphics object
由于PNG解码器227有一个解码速度的上限,从GOBJ输入缓冲器提交数据到PNG解码器缓冲器226,以便数据的传送速度不超过PNG解码器227的解码速度。因而,PNG数据以一个数据传送速度输入到PNG解码器缓冲器226,该速度相应于一个垂直线的斜率,该垂直线表示PNG解码器227中的PNG数据的处理时间是0。Since the
即使PNG数据没有全部输入PNG解码器227,也可以开始PNG数据的解码。图45A、图45B、图45C和图45D所示的例子中,存储在GOBJ输入缓冲器中的对象GOBJ#1完全传送到PNG解码器227之后,到该GOBJ缓冲器的下一个对象GOBJ#2的PNG数据的输入开始进行。Even if all the PNG data is not input to the
类似地,对象GOBJ#2的PNG数据和对象GOBJ#2的PNG数据以相应于特别斜率B和C的各自的传送速度,分别输入PNG解码器缓冲器226。实际上,斜率B在各个区域中都不同。Similarly, the PNG data of the
当对象GOBJ#1的有效周期在GOBJ#1的pts时间开始时,已解码并且存储在PNG解码器缓冲器中的对象GOBJ#1的位映象数据传送到对象缓冲器228(图45B)。对象GOBJ#1传送到对象缓冲器228的有效周期持续到由GOBJ#1表示结束的时间。When the effective period of the
在对象GOBJ#1的有效周期中,当发出了GOBJ#1的命令Display ONCmd.时,存储在对象缓冲器228中对象GOBJ#1的位映象数据传送到平面缓冲器229,并且显示(图45A)。如将要描述的,传送位映象数据到平面缓冲器229的传送速度的上限根据总线宽度等的影响而改变。因而,位映象数据是以一个相应于例如特定斜率D的传送速度而写入平面缓冲器229的。During the effective period of the
类似地,其它对象GOBJ#2和对象GOBJ#3的位映象数据是对应于斜率E、F和G的传送速度,写入平面缓冲器229的。Similarly, the bitmap data of the other
持续地显示对象GOBJ#1,直到发出GOBJ#1的命令Display OFF cmd,该命令清除对象GOBJ#1的指示。当发出对象GOBJ#1的命令Display OFFcmd.时,删除存储在平面缓冲器229中的对象GOBJ#1的位映象数据,并且在屏幕上清除对象GOBJ#1。The
对象GOBJ#2和对象GOBJ#3是连续地输入GOBJ缓冲器的。类似于对象GOBJ#1,对象GOBJ#2和对象GOBJ##的解码在GOBJ#2的时间dts和GOBJ#3的时间dts开始。PNG数据提供给PNG解码器227。PNG解码器227用PNG解码器缓冲器解码PNG数据,并且输出位映象数据。对象GOBJ#2的有效周期是由GOBJ#2的指定时间pts。GOBJ#2的命令Display ON cmd.(图45A到图45D中未示出)显示对象GOBJ#2。对象缓冲器228将位映象数据传送到平面缓冲器229。显示对象GOBJ#2,直到发出GOBJ#2的命令Display OFF cmd.。
在图45A到图45D所示的例子中,以GOBJ#2的命令Display OFF cmd.(未示出)清除对象GOBJ#2之后,用GOBJ#2的命令Display ON cmd.再次显示对象GOBJ#2。对象GOBJ#2的位映象数据保存在对象缓冲器228中,直到GOBJ#1的有效周期结束时间表示结束指示到对象GOBJ#2。因而,通过GOBJ#2的命令Display ON cmd.,可以重复地显示对象GOBJ#2。In the example shown in FIGS. 45A to 45D , after the
另一方面,为对象GOBJ#3指定的有效周期与为对象GOBJ#2指定的有效周期交迭。在这种情况下,对象存储器228根据其空白容量在不同的区域存储多个位映象数据。例如,对象GOBJ#2的数据从对象缓冲器228传送到平面缓冲器229并显示时,当对象GOBJ#3的位映象数据从对象缓冲器228的不同区域传送时,两个位映象数据可以同时显示。On the other hand, the valid period specified for the
2-11.关于图形的传送速度2-11. Regarding the transmission speed of graphics
接下来,将考虑图形对象解码器模型240(下文称作解码器模型240)设置在播放器中的情况。要使同一个光盘的数据的再现具有不同播放器的兼容性,必需向解码器模型240施加预定的限制。例如,解码器模型240具有图形处理能力的上限。因而,当输入了超过该能力上限的图形数据时,不可能很好地对图形数据进行解码。结果,不能正常地显示图形数据。Next, a case where a graphics object decoder model 240 (hereinafter referred to as a decoder model 240 ) is provided in a player will be considered. To make reproduction of data from the same optical disc compatible with different players, it is necessary to impose predetermined restrictions on the
在一个标准中应当规定播放器端的图形处理的最小能力。另一方面,该标准规定的最小能力中可以处理的图形可以在内容制作者一端准备。通过将播放器端具有图形处理的能力与内容制造者端预备的图形处理的能力相匹配,可以保持兼容再现能力。The minimum capabilities of graphics processing on the player side should be specified in a standard. On the other hand, graphics that can be handled in the minimum capacity prescribed by the standard can be prepared on the content producer side. Compatible reproduction capabilities can be maintained by matching the capability of graphics processing on the player side with the capability of graphics processing prepared on the content producer side.
根据本发明的第一模式,在图44中,规定了从GOBJ剖析器224到PNG解码器缓冲器226的数据传送速度R(1),以及从命令处理器225到平面缓冲器229的数据传送速度R(2)。According to the first mode of the present invention, in FIG. 44, the data transfer rate R(1) from the
数据传送速度R(1)规定了每单元时间传输到PNG解码器缓冲器226的数据传送数量。换句话说,图45C所示的斜率A、B和C对应于数据传送速度R(1)。这规定了解码能力,该能力表示安排在PNG解码器缓冲器226下游的PNG解码器227,在单元时间内能够解码的压缩编码的图形数据的数量。因而,通过限制该数据传送速度R(1),可以防止不完全地解码以及不正确地显示所输入的压缩编码的图形数据。The data transfer rate R(1) specifies the number of data transfers to the
数据传送速度R(2)规定了图像的更新速度。平面缓冲器229对应于实际在显示装置上的屏幕。因而,用户看到的图形的更新速度依赖于数据写到平面缓冲器229的速度。数据传送速度R(2)规定了平面的所有最小更新间隔,也就是在[字节/秒]单元中屏幕的所有。换句话说,图45A所示的斜率D、E、F和G对应于数据传送速度R(2)。The data transfer rate R(2) specifies the update rate of the image. The
当更新了平面的一部分时,由于更新的图像数据的数量很小,其更新的周期是一个比数据传送速度R(2)规定的最小更新时间间隔还小得多的周期。然而,更新周期并不总是与更新的图像数据的数据数量成比例的。更新时间间隔很大程度上受平面上图像数据排列的影响。When a part of the plane is updated, since the amount of image data to be updated is small, the update cycle is a cycle much shorter than the minimum update time interval specified by the data transfer rate R(2). However, the update cycle is not always proportional to the data amount of updated image data. The update interval is largely influenced by the arrangement of the image data on the plane.
接下来,参照图46,详细地描述平面的更新速度。假定对象缓冲器228存储了两个图形对象460和461,图形对象460和461写入平面缓冲器229并显示。Next, referring to FIG. 46, the update speed of the plane will be described in detail. Assuming that the
图形对象460和461从对象缓冲器228中读出,并提供给命令处理器/图形分割器225。命令处理器/图形分割器225的一个输出限定在上述的更新速度R(2),以限制屏幕上的更新速度(更新时间间隔)。Graphics objects 460 and 461 are read from
在这里,图形对象460和461的更新速度更多地取决于它们是如何置于平面上的,而不是它们的数据总量。这是由于一个执行图形处理的常规的图形处理器更新每个矩形区域中的平面。Here, the update speed of graphics objects 460 and 461 depends more on how they are placed on the plane than on their total data volume. This is due to a conventional graphics processor performing graphics processing updating the planes in each rectangular area.
例如,用一个正方形区域262更新一个平面,该区域包括位于该平面中的所有图形对象460和461。换句话说,命令处理器/图形分割器225根据图形对象460和461中的排列信息,形成正方形区域262中的图像数据。正方形区域262中的图像数据通过一个总线提供给平面缓冲器229。平面缓冲器229根据指定的显示位置,用正方形区域262中的数据替换相应于正方形区域262的区域的数据。For example, a plane is updated with a square area 262 that includes all graphics objects 460 and 461 located in the plane. In other words, the command processor/
由于从命令处理器/图形分割器225输出的图像数据是位映象数据,图像数据具有的数据数量取决于该图像的区域,而不是图像的内容。图46所示的例子中,包括图形对象460和461的正方形区域262的数据数量可以用例如(宽×高)像素表示,也就是(宽×高字节)。Since the image data output from the command processor/
由于数据传送到平面缓冲器229的速度确定为速度R(2)[字节/秒],很清楚,图形对象460和461可以在{速度R(2)/(宽×高)}秒中更新。{速度R(2)/(宽×高)}过去后,可以提取下一个图形对象。因此,当光盘制造者端创建一个程序,其允许以至少上述时间周期的时间间隔提取两个图形对象,可以用任何播放器显示相同的图形。因而,任何播放器都可以保持该再现能力。Since the speed at which data is transferred to the
估计了数据传送速度R(2)后,可以确定字幕的动画速度,以便可以保持再现的兼容性,这将在下面描述。After estimating the data transfer rate R(2), the animation speed of the subtitles can be determined so that the compatibility of reproduction can be maintained, as will be described below.
2-12.图形对象结构的细节2-12. Details of Graphics Object Structure
接下来,将详细描述图形对象200的结构。图47所示的语法描述了图形对象200的结构的一个例子。图47示出了一个语法的示意图,该语法描述了一个图形对象200结构的例子。图42A所示的图形对象标题201、显示命令控制表格202和PNG数据区域203分别对应于块GraphicsObjectHeader()、块GOBJCommandTable()和块PNGImageReaion()。Next, the structure of the
块GraphicsObjectHeader()以一个域开始。该域length具有一个8位的数据长度、0或更大的整数。域length描述了紧接域length之后直到块GraphicsObjectHeader()尾端的位长。域presentation_end_time_stamp具有33位的数据长度,0或更大的整数。域presentation_end_time描述了图形对象200的有效周期结束时间。该图形对象的有效周期是从PES包标题的pts直到域presentation_end_time_stamp中描述的有效周期结束时间。域Number_of_PNG_image具有8位的数据长度,0或更大的整数,并且描述在块PNGImageRegion()中描述的PNG图像的数量。域Number_of_DispCmds具有8位的数据长度,0或更大的整数,并且描述了块GOBJCommandTable()中描述的显示控制命令的数量。The block GraphicsObjectHeader() begins with a field. The field length has an 8-bit data length, an integer of 0 or greater. The field length describes the bit length immediately after the field length until the end of the block GraphicsObjectHeader(). The field presentation_end_time_stamp has a data length of 33 bits, an integer of 0 or more. The field presentation_end_time describes the effective period end time of the
块GraphicsObjectHeader()中的块GlobalPaletteTable()描述了图形对象200中公用的调色板表格的信息。块GlobalPaletteTable()中描述的调色板表格信息是描述为公用调色板表格230的内容。域start_address_of_PNG_image(i)具有32位的数据长度,0或更大的整数,并且描述了i-th PNG图像的数据PNG_image(i)从块GraphicsObject()的开始,以相关数量的字节开始的位置。The block GlobalPaletteTable() in the block GraphicsObjectHeader() describes the information of the palette table common in the graphics object 200 . The palette table information described in the block GlobalPaletteTable() is the content described as the common palette table 230 . The field start_address_of_PNG_image(i) has a data length of 32 bits, an integer of 0 or greater, and describes the position of the i-th PNG image's data PNG_image(i) starting at the relevant number of bytes from the beginning of the block GraphicsObject() .
域PNG_file_name(i)描述了从域start_address_of_PNG_image(i)开始的PNG数据的文件名。块PNGImageRegion()中的域PNG_image(i)的内容与单个PNG文件中的内容相同。块PNGImageRegion()是由连接一个或更多PNG文件创建的。例如,在图42A中,PNG数据203A、203B、...,203n是连接在一起的,并且创建了块PNGImageRegion()。在这里,文件PNG_file_name(i)中可以描述一个文件名,以便不会丢失该文件。相反,当分解PNGImageRegion()时,可以得到单个的PNG文件。单个的域PNG_file_name(i)是具有域PNG_file_name(i)中所描述的文件名的单个文件。The field PNG_file_name(i) describes the file name of the PNG data starting from the field start_address_of_PNG_image(i). The content of field PNG_image(i) in block PNGImageRegion() is the same as in a single PNG file. Chunks PNGImageRegion() are created by concatenating one or more PNG files. For example, in FIG. 42A,
块GOBJCommandTable()是由命令组DispCmds(i)组成的,其是在相同时间执行的显示控制命令的连接。命令组DispCmds(i)描述了在命令execution_time(时间)开始的显示控制命令,该命令execution_time(时间)描述了执行时间。换句话说,命令execution_time(时间)之后直到下一个命令execution_time(时间)的部分组成了命令组DispCmds(i)。The block GOBJCommandTable() is composed of command groups DispCmds(i), which are concatenations of display control commands executed at the same time. The command group DispCmds(i) describes a display control command starting at command execution_time (time) which describes the execution time. In other words, the part after the command execution_time (time) until the next command execution_time (time) constitutes the command group DispCmds(i).
如上所述,块PNGImageRegion()描述了域PNG_image(i),该域是根据PNG系统压缩的一个图像的数据。As described above, the block PNGImageRegion() describes the field PNG_image(i), which is the data of an image compressed according to the PNG system.
任何padding_word的数量可以在块GraphicsObjectHeader()和块GOBJCommandTable()之间描述。类似地,任何padding_word的数量可以在块GOBJCommandTable()和PNGImageRegion()之间描述。Any amount of padding_word can be described between block GraphicsObjectHeader() and block GOBJCommandTable(). Similarly, any amount of padding_word can be described between blocks GOBJCommandTable() and PNGImageRegion().
图48所示的语法描述了上述块GlobalPaletteTable()的结构的例子。域number_of_palette_entries描述了其之前的调色板数据的数量。当用具有8位数据长度的索引数字描述一个图像时,域number_of_palette_entries的最大数量是256。因而,可以使用256色。当仅使用256色中的一部分时,仅需要必要的调色板数据。域number_of_palette_entries描述了使用的索引的数量。The syntax shown in Fig. 48 describes an example of the structure of the above-mentioned block GlobalPaletteTable(). The field number_of_palette_entries describes the number of palette data before it. The maximum number of fields number_of_palette_entries is 256 when an image is described with an index number having a data length of 8 bits. Thus, 256 colors can be used. When only a part of 256 colors is used, only necessary palette data is required. The field number_of_palette_entries describes the number of indexes used.
域palette_index_number描述了指定给在域palette_index_number之前的域red_value、域green_value、域blue_value和域alpha的颜色和不透明度的索引数字,图像数据用索引数字指示颜色和不透明度。The field palette_index_number describes the index number of the color and opacity assigned to the field red_value, field green_value, field blue_value, and field alpha preceding the field palette_index_number, and the image data indicates the color and opacity with the index number.
在块GlobalPaletteTable()的for语句循环中,具有相同值的域palette_index_number不会被描述两次以上。每个域red_value、域green_value、域blue_value具有8位的数据长度,以及0或更大的整数。域red_value、域green_value、域blue_value分别指定红、绿和蓝。域alpha具有8位的数据长度。域alpha表示不透明度α。当域alpha的值是0时,表示完全透明。当域alpha的值是255时,表示完全不透明。In the for statement loop of the block GlobalPaletteTable(), the field palette_index_number with the same value will not be described more than twice. Each field red_value, field green_value, field blue_value has a data length of 8 bits, and an integer of 0 or more. Field red_value, field green_value, and field blue_value specify red, green, and blue, respectively. The field alpha has a data length of 8 bits. The field alpha represents the opacity alpha. When the value of field alpha is 0, it means completely transparent. When the field alpha has a value of 255, it is completely opaque.
每个PNG图像具有调色板信息PLTE的块。根据本发明的第一模式,不使用调色板信息PLTE,而是使用块GlobalPaletteTable()确定的调色板信息。当同时显示多个PNG图像时,如果该PNG图像使用不同调色板的颜色,是很难以正确的颜色显示该PNG图像的。换句话说,GraphicsObject()的域PNG_image(i)中描述的多个PNG图像指示公用块GlobalPaletteTable()并且使用块GlobalPaletteTable()中描述的公用调色板表格。Each PNG image has a block of palette information PLTE. According to the first mode of the invention, instead of using the palette information PLTE, palette information determined by the block GlobalPaletteTable() is used. When displaying multiple PNG images at the same time, it is difficult to display the PNG images in correct colors if the PNG images use colors from different palettes. In other words, a plurality of PNG images described in the field PNG_image(i) of GraphicsObject( ) indicate the common block GlobalPaletteTable( ) and use the common palette table described in the block GlobalPaletteTable( ).
接下来,将描述命令组DispCmds(i)。命令组DispCmds(i)描述了显示控制命令,其控制图形对象200的显示。在命令组DispCmds(i)中,命令execution_time(start_time)使得在下一个命令execution_time(start_time)之前描述了的命令在指定时间start_time执行。时间start_time的开始点是图形对象200的pts。时间start_time的单元与pts相同。Next, the command group DispCmds(i) will be described. The command group DispCmds(i) describes a display control command, which controls the display of the
命令组DispCmds(i)可以描述多个命令,其在命令execution_time(start_time)中描述的时间start_time执行。命令组DispCmds(i)执行的命令在命令execution_time(start_time)中描述的时间start_time同时执行。在命令组DispCmds(i)中描述的命令执行之前,如果下一个命令组DispCmds(i+1)的命令execution_time(start_time)中描述的时间start_time已经过去,则取消命令组DispCmds(i)的执行。取而代之的,是执行下一个命令组DispCmds(i+1)。The command group DispCmds(i) can describe a plurality of commands, which are executed at the time start_time described in the command execution_time(start_time). The commands executed by the command group DispCmds(i) are executed simultaneously at the time start_time described in the command execution_time(start_time). If the time start_time described in the command execution_time(start_time) of the next command group DispCmds(i+1) elapses before the command described in the command group DispCmds(i) is executed, the execution of the command group DispCmds(i) is canceled. Instead, the next command group DispCmds(i+1) is executed.
在命令组DispCmds(i)中描述的除了命令execution_time(start_time)以外的其它显示控制命令被认为是在图49A和图49B中以列出。这些显示控制命令是由图49A和图49B所示的指定数字。Display control commands other than the command execution_time(start_time) described in the command group DispCmds(i) are considered to be listed in FIGS. 49A and 49B. These display control commands are assigned numbers as shown in Figs. 49A and 49B.
(1)命令execution_time(start_time)(1) Command execution_time(start_time)
(2)显示图形对象的命令(2) Commands to display graphic objects
(3)清除图形对象的命令(3) Command to clear graphic objects
(4)改变使用的调色板表格的颜色和不透明度的命令(4) Commands to change the color and opacity of the used palette table
(5)设置显示在平面上的图形对象的位置和大小的命令(5) Commands to set the position and size of graphic objects displayed on the plane
(6)设置图形对象的显示范围的命令(6) Commands to set the display range of graphic objects
(7)再现一个效果声音的命令(7) Command to reproduce an effect sound
(8)将一个效果声音指定到图像数据(PNG数据)的命令(8) Command to assign an effect sound to image data (PNG data)
上述7种类型的命令只是例子。换句话说,命令组DispCmds(i)中的命令不限于上述命令。可以确定其它显示控制命令,并添加到命令组DispCmds(i)。The above seven types of commands are just examples. In other words, the commands in the command group DispCmds(i) are not limited to the above-mentioned commands. Other display control commands can be identified and added to the command group DispCmds(i).
图形对象200的显示开始命令(2)和显示结束命令(3)是所谓淡入/淡出命令,其分别描述为命令fade_in(fade_in_time)和命令fade_out(fade_out_time)。The display start command (2) and display end command (3) of the
命令fade_in(fade_in_time)指定淡入操作。命令fade_in(fade_in_time)使得一个图形对象200从未显示状态逐渐地显示到显示状态。通过相应于时间fade_in_time逐渐地增加α混合的不透明度α的值,实现淡入操作。当命令fade_in(fade_in_time)跟随在命令execution_time(start_time)之后时,透明的图形对象200在由命令execution_time(start_time)指定的时间start_time之后,逐渐地变得不透明。在自变量时间fade_in_time所指定的时间过去后,所有调色板索引的不透明度α设置成公用调色板表格指定的一个值。The command fade_in(fade_in_time) specifies the fade-in operation. The command fade_in(fade_in_time) causes a
当命令fade_in(fade_in_time)的时间fade_in_time设置为0时,图形对象200立即以调色板表格中指定的颜色和不透明度α显示。When the time fade_in_time of the command fade_in(fade_in_time) is set to 0, the graphics object 200 is immediately displayed with the color and opacity α specified in the palette table.
淡出是淡入的反处理。淡出是命令fade_out(fade_out_time)指定的。命令fade_out(fade_out_time))使得一个图形对象200从显示状态逐渐地被清除掉。通过相应于时间fade_in_out逐渐地减少α混合的不透明度α的值,实现淡出操作。当命令fade_out(fade_out_time)跟随在命令execution_time(start_time)之后时,非透明的图形对象200在由命令execution_time(start_time)指定的时间start_time之后,逐渐地变得透明。在自变量时间fade_out_time所指定的时间过去后,所有调色板索引的不透明度α的值设置成0。结果,图形对象200完全地变成透明且不可见。Fade out is the inverse of fade in. Fade out is specified by the command fade_out(fade_out_time). The command fade_out(fade_out_time)) causes a
当命令fade_out(fade_out_time)的时间fade_out_time设置成0时,立即清除图形对象200。When the time fade_out_time of the command fade_out(fade_out_time) is set to 0, the graphics object 200 is cleared immediately.
当不透明度α的值随着时间流逝,逐渐地在淡入和淡出之间变化时,可以更好地获得更自然的淡入和淡出效果。可选地,在淡入中,在由时间fade_in_time指定的时间过去之后,不透明度α的值应当与调色板表格中的指定的值相匹配。然而,不透明度α的分辨率和等级并不是由命令指定的。实际上,不透明度α的分辨率和等级依赖所安装的系统。A more natural fade-in and fade-out effect is better achieved when the value of the opacity α gradually changes between fading in and out over time. Optionally, in fade-in, after the time specified by time fade_in_time has elapsed, the value of opacity α should match the value specified in the palette table. However, the resolution and level of opacity alpha is not specified by the command. In practice, the resolution and level of opacity alpha depends on the installed system.
上述的例子中,为了高识别度,命令以例如“fade_in()”和“fade_out()”等文本表示。然而,实际上,命令fade_in()和命令fade_out()与它们的自变量一起转换成预定的二进制值,并且以DispCmds(i)描述。这同样适用于下面将描述的命令。In the above examples, the commands are expressed in text such as "fade_in()" and "fade_out()" for high recognition. Actually, however, the commands fade_in( ) and command fade_out( ) are converted into predetermined binary values together with their arguments, and are described by DispCmds(i). The same applies to the commands described below.
调色板表格颜色和不透明度α改变命令(4)改变调色板信息。该命令以change_palette(index,newR,newG,newB,newAlpah)的格式描述。同时在字幕平面11和图形平面12上显示的PNG图像涉及图24所示的公用调色板表格,其由图48所示的语法确定。确定为GlobalPaletteTable()的调色板信息用作公用调色板表格。使用命令change_palette(index,newR,newG,newB,newAlpah),可以改变公用调色板信息。Palette table color and opacity alpha change command (4) changes the palette information. This command is described in the format of change_palette(index, newR, newG, newB, newAlpah). A PNG image displayed on both the
换句话说,在命令change_palette(index,newR,newG,newB,newAlpah)中作为自变量描述的值index,newR,newG,newB,newAlpah,使得由调色板号码索引所表示的颜色索引值的三个原始颜色值R、G和B,改变成值newR、newG和newB,不透明度α的值改变成值newAlpah。In other words, the value index, newR, newG, newB, newAlpah described as an argument in the command change_palette(index, newR, newG, newB, newAlpah) makes three of the color index values indicated by the palette number index. The original color values R, G, and B are changed to the values newR, newG, and newB, and the value of opacity α is changed to the value newAlpah.
命令(5)用在set_display_box(x1,y1,x2,y2)的格式中,其在一个平面上设置图形对象的显示位置和尺寸。命令(5)使图形对象200位于正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2)中,该区域是平面上的坐标(x1,y1)和(x2,y2)确定的。命令(6)用在set_clipping_box(a1,b1,a2,b2)格式中,其设置一个图形对象的显示范围。命令(6)使正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)显示在平面上,该正方形区域是由图形对象200的PNG图像的(a1,b1)和(a2,b2)坐标确定的。Command (5) is used in the format of set_display_box(x1, y1, x2, y2), which sets the display position and size of a graphic object on a plane. Command (5) causes the
接下来,参照图50A和图50B,详细描述命令set_display_box(x1,y1,x2,y2)和命令set_clipping_box(a1,b1,a2,b2)。如图51所示,在图50A和图50B的坐标上,显示屏幕的左上角确定为原点,水平向右方向用x标识,垂直向下方向用y标识,用(x,y)标识坐标。Next, the command set_display_box(x1, y1, x2, y2) and the command set_clipping_box(a1, b1, a2, b2) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50A and 50B. As shown in FIG. 51, on the coordinates of FIG. 50A and FIG. 50B, the upper left corner of the display screen is determined as the origin, the horizontal rightward direction is marked by x, the vertical downward direction is marked by y, and the coordinates are marked by (x, y).
如图50A所示,set_clipping_box(a1,b1,a2,b2)使得实际显示的一个正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)设置在图形对象200的PNG图像250中。在图50A所示的例子中,假定正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)设置得比PNG图像250小。命令set_display_box(x1,y1,x2,y2)使正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)的真实显示位置设置在正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2)的平面上(见图50B)。换句话说,只有PNG图像250的正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)正对着屏幕的正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2)而显示。As shown in FIG. 50A , set_clipping_box( a1 , b1 , a2 , b2 ) causes actually displayed one square area ( a1 , b1 )( a2 , b2 ) to be set in the PNG image 250 of the
当正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)比实际上显示的正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2)大时,只显示正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)中的正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2)的PNG图像。相反,当正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)比实际上显示的正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2)小时,正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2)中正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)的外部作为透明区域处理。When the square area (a1, b1) (a2, b2) is larger than the actually displayed square area (x1, y1) (x2, y2), only the square in the square area (a1, b1) (a2, b2) is displayed PNG image of region (x1,y1)(x2,y2). On the contrary, when the square area (a1, b1) (a2, b2) is smaller than the actually displayed square area (x1, y1) (x2, y2), the square area (x1, y1) (x2, y2) in the square area ( The outside of a1, b1)(a2, b2) is treated as a transparent area.
当上述显示控制命令与若干个execution_time(start_time)命令一起描述时,可以显示随着时间流逝而改变的字幕和同步图形。例如,在图47的图形对象200中,在块GOBJCommandTable()中描述若干命令组DispCmds(i)。每个命令组DispCmds(i)中都描述了显示控制命令execution_time(start_time),其时间start_time是不同的,以便在start_time指定的开始时间执行命令组DispCmds(i)。When the above-mentioned display control command is described together with several execution_time (start_time) commands, subtitles and synchronous graphics that change with the lapse of time can be displayed. For example, in the
图52示出了命令组DispCmds(i)的描述,以及图形对象200的显示改变的例子。在图52中,水平轴表示时间的流逝,然而垂直轴表示图形对象200的不透明度。在图52中,不透明度在向上方向上增加。Pts标识的时间是原点。FIG. 52 shows a description of the command group DispCmds(i), and an example of display change of the
在第一命令组DispCmds(0)中,命令set_display_box(800,800,1300,900)在平面上设置一个显示区域。命令set_clipping_box(0,0,500,100)设置图形对象200的PNG图像的显示区域。命令fade_in(2秒)在时间[0]产生为时两秒的淡入处理。在接下来的命令组DispCmds(1)中,命令change_palette(index,newR,newG,newB,newAlpah)描述了颜色索引值[1]、[2]、[3]和[4]。命令组DispCmds(1)还使索引值[1]、[2]、[3]和[4]所指示的颜色和不透明度α在时间[800]改变。下一个命令组DispCmds(2)使一个显示的图形对象200在时间[2000]产生两秒的淡出。In the first command group DispCmds(0), the command set_display_box(800, 800, 1300, 900) sets a display area on the plane. The command set_clipping_box(0, 0, 500, 100) sets the display area of the PNG image of the
如图52所示,当依次描述命令组DispCmds(0)、DispCmds(1)和DispCmds(2)时,可以实现例如随时间流逝而改变的字幕。换句话说,当正确地使用命令组DispCmds(0)、DispCmds(1)和DispCmds(2)时,字幕和按键图像显示成动画。As shown in FIG. 52, when the command groups DispCmds(0), DispCmds(1), and DispCmds(2) are sequentially described, subtitles that change with the lapse of time, for example, can be realized. In other words, when the command groups DispCmds(0), DispCmds(1) and DispCmds(2) are used correctly, subtitles and button images are displayed as animations.
图53A、图53B、图53C和图53D示出了逐渐显示字幕的淡入的例子。在图53A到图53D中,控制淡入,以便逐渐地显示字幕。上述简单的淡入可以用图52所示的与命令组DispCmds(0)相似的命令完成。53A, 53B, 53C, and 53D show examples of gradually displaying fade-in of subtitles. In FIGS. 53A to 53D, fade-in is controlled so that subtitles are gradually displayed. The simple fade-in described above can be accomplished with a command similar to the command group DispCmds(0) shown in FIG. 52 .
图54A和图54B示出了作为字幕的PNG图像260在平面之间移动的例子。上述PNG图像260用多个命令set_display_box(x1,y1,x2,y2)实现。例如,在第一命令组DispCmds(0)中,命令execution_time(start_time)设置开始时间。命令set_clipping_box(a1,b1,a2,b2)设置PNG图像260的显示区域,如图54A所示。命令set_display_box(x1,y1,x2,y2)在平面上设置PNG图像的初始显示区域。54A and 54B show an example in which a
在下一个命令组DispCmds(1)中,命令execution_time(start_time)将一个时间设置为开始时间,该时间位于命令组DispCmds(1)的执行之后。命令set_display_box(x1′,y1′,x2′,y2′)对将要移到平面上的显示区域进行设置。类似地,在下一个命令组DispCmds(2),命令execution_time(start_time)将一个时间设置为开始时间,该时间命令组DispCmds(1)的执行之后。命令set_display_box(x1″,y1″,x2″,y2″)对将要移到平面上的显示区域进行设置。In the next command group DispCmds(1), the command execution_time(start_time) sets a time as the start time after the execution of the command group DispCmds(1). The command set_display_box(x1', y1', x2', y2') sets the display area to be moved on the plane. Similarly, in the next command group DispCmds(2), the command execution_time(start_time) sets a time after execution of the command group DispCmds(1) as the start time. The command set_display_box(x1″, y1″, x2″, y2″) sets the display area to be moved on the plane.
因而,如图54B所示,作为字幕的PNG图像260可以移动到平面上正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2),正方形区域(x1′,y1′)(x2′,y2′)和正方形区域(x1″,y1″)(x2″,y2″)。Thus, as shown in FIG. 54B, the
图55A和图55B示出了移动并滚动作为字幕的PNG图像261的显示区域262的例子。这可以用多个命令set_clipping_box(a1,b1,a2,b2)实现。例如,在第一命令组DispCmds(0)中,命令execution_time(start_time)设置开始时间。命令set_clipping_box(a1,b1,a2,b2)设置起始显示在PNG图像260上的正方形区域262,如图55A所示。命令set_display_box(x1,y1,x2,y2)设置显示在一个平面上的PNG区域260的正方形区域。55A and 55B show an example of moving and scrolling the display area 262 of the PNG image 261 which is a subtitle. This can be achieved with multiple commands set_clipping_box(a1, b1, a2, b2). For example, in the first command group DispCmds(0), the command execution_time(start_time) sets the start time. The command set_clipping_box(a1, b1, a2, b2) sets a square area 262 initially displayed on the
在下一个命令组DispCmds(1)中,命令execution_time(start_time)将处于命令组DispCmds(1)执行之后的预定时间设置为开始时间。命令set_clipping_box(a1′,b1′,a2′,b2′)对PNG图像260中将要移动的显示区域进行设置。类似地,在下一个命令组DispCmds(2)中,命令execution_time(start_time)将处于命令组DispCmds(1)执行之后的预定时间设置为开始时间。命令set_clipping_box(a1″,b1″,a2″,b2″)对PNG图像260中将要移动的方形区域进行设置。In the next command group DispCmds(1), the command execution_time(start_time) sets a predetermined time after execution of the command group DispCmds(1) as the start time. The command set_clipping_box(a1', b1', a2', b2') sets the display area to be moved in the
因而,如图55B所示,作为PNG图像261一部分的正方形区域从正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)移动到平面上的正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2)的正方形区域(a1′,b1′)(a2′,b2′)和正方形区域a1″,b1″)(a2″,b2″)。从而,滚动字幕。Thus, as shown in FIG. 55B, the square area that is a part of the PNG image 261 moves from the square area (a1, b1) (a2, b2) to the square area (x1, y1) (x2, y2) of the square area on the plane ( a1', b1')(a2', b2') and square area a1", b1")(a2", b2"). Thus, the subtitles are scrolled.
图56A和图56B示出了设置作为PNG图像265的一部分的帧的例子,该帧移动到PNG图像265中,而且该帧的显示位置移动到平面上。这可以由同时执行多个命令set_display_box(x1,y1,x2,y2)和set_clipping_box(a1,b1,a2,b2)而实现。例如,在第一命令组DispCmds(0)中,命令execution_time(start_time)设置开始时间。命令set_display_box(x1,y1,x2,y2)和命令set_clipping_box(a1,b1,a2,b2)设置帧266A(见图56A)。56A and 56B show an example of setting a frame that is a part of the PNG image 265, the frame is moved into the PNG image 265, and the display position of the frame is moved to the plane. This can be achieved by executing multiple commands set_display_box(x1, y1, x2, y2) and set_clipping_box(a1, b1, a2, b2) simultaneously. For example, in the first command group DispCmds(0), the command execution_time(start_time) sets the start time. The commands set_display_box(x1, y1, x2, y2) and the commands set_clipping_box(a1, b1, a2, b2) set frame 266A (see FIG. 56A).
例如,命令set_display_box(x1,y1,x2,y2)设置显示在一个平面上的正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2)。命令set_clipping_box(a1,b1,a2,b2)设置显示在PNG图像265中的正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)。正方形区域(x1,y1)(x2,y2)和正方形区域(a1,b1)(a2,b2)构成帧266A。For example, the command set_display_box(x1, y1, x2, y2) sets the square area (x1, y1)(x2, y2) displayed on a plane. The command set_clipping_box(a1, b1, a2, b2) sets the square area (a1, b1)(a2, b2) displayed in the PNG image 265. The square area (x1, y1) (x2, y2) and the square area (a1, b1) (a2, b2) constitute a frame 266A.
在下一个命令组DispCmds(1)中,命令execution_time(start_time)将位于命令组DispCmds(0)之后的预定时间设置为开始时间。命令set_display_box(x1′,y1′,x2′,y2′)在平面上设置一个正方形区域(x1′,y1′)(x2′,y2′)。命令set_clipping_box(a1′,b1′,a2′,b2′)在PNG画面265上设置正方形区域(a1′,b1′)(a2′,b2′)。正方形区域(x1′,y1′)(x2′,y2′)和正方形区域(a1′,b1′)(a2′,b2′)组成一个帧266B,帧266A移动到帧266B。同样,在另一个命令组DispCmds(2)中,命令execution_time(start_time)将位于执行命令组DispCmds(1)之后的预定时间设置为开始时间。命令set_display_box(x1″,y1″,x2″,y2″)在平面上设置一个正方形区域(x1″,y1″)(x2″,y2″)。命令set_clipping_box(a1″,b1″,a2″,b2″)在PNG画面265上设置正方形区域(a1″,b1″)(a2″,b2″)。正方形区域(x1″,y1″)(x2″,y2″)和正方形区域(a1″,b1″)(a2″,b2″)构成帧266C,帧266B移动到帧266C。In the next command group DispCmds(1), the command execution_time(start_time) sets a predetermined time after the command group DispCmds(0) as the start time. The command set_display_box(x1', y1', x2', y2') sets a square area (x1', y1')(x2', y2') on the plane. The command set_clipping_box(a1', b1', a2', b2') sets a square area (a1', b1')(a2', b2') on the PNG picture 265 . The square area (x1', y1') (x2', y2') and the square area (a1', b1') (a2', b2') constitute a frame 266B, and the frame 266A moves to the frame 266B. Also, in another command group DispCmds(2), the command execution_time(start_time) sets a predetermined time after the execution of the command group DispCmds(1) as the start time. The command set_display_box(x1", y1", x2", y2") sets a square area (x1", y1")(x2", y2") on the plane. The command set_clipping_box(a1″, b1″, a2″, b2″) sets a square area (a1″, b1″)(a2″, b2″) on the PNG picture 265 . The square area (x1", y1") (x2", y2") and the square area (a1", b1") (a2", b2") constitute a frame 266C, and the frame 266B moves to the frame 266C.
因而,如图56B所示,当移动字幕的PNG图像265的一部分的正方形区域时,该正方形区域可以从帧266A移动到帧266B再移动到帧266C。Thus, as shown in FIG. 56B, when moving a square area of a portion of the PNG image 265 of subtitles, the square area may be moved from frame 266A to frame 266B to frame 266C.
因而,根据本发明的第一模式,由于图形对象200的显示控制是由命令组DispCmds(i)执行,命令组DispCmds(i)中的每个显示控制命令是由命令execution_time(start_time)分组的,可以在字幕平面11和图形平面12上很容易地实现不同的显示。Thus, according to the first mode of the present invention, since the display control of the
2-13关于效果声音2-13 About the effect sound
根据本发明的第一模式,一个声音输出可以与图形对象200的显示控制同步。声音输出是由显示控制命令(7)和显示控制命令(8)确定的,显示控制命令(7)再现一个效果声音,显示控制命令(8)将效果声音指定给显示控制命令(2)到(8)中的图像数据,上述命令组DispCmds(i)的命令execution_time(start_time)除外。声音数据指定了唯一的识别sound_id。According to the first mode of the present invention, a sound output can be synchronized with the display control of the
效果声音是根据字幕或按键的显示控制,或与其同步地再现的声音,而不是与显示在影片平面上的影片或静止画面同步再现的声音(例如,在影片里,与影片成对地记录的声音)。Effect sound is the sound reproduced in accordance with the display control of subtitles or buttons, or in synchronization with it, rather than in synchronization with the film or still picture displayed on the film plane (for example, in a film, recorded in pairs with the film sound).
如相关技术部分所述,用户使用例如远程控制命令器(在下文中称作远程控制器)操作指定为上、下、左、右的键(方向键),以便选择显示在菜单屏幕上的一个按键。此后,用户通过ok键执行指定到选择的按键的操作。每个按键有三个状态:正常状态(非选择状态)、选择状态和执行状态。每个按键的上述三个状态指定了不同的图形对象。因而,按键图像(形状和颜色)可以为每个按键的三个状态而改变。用户可以很容易地分辨使用不同图像的按键的状态。As described in the Related Art section, the user operates keys (direction keys) designated as up, down, left, and right using, for example, a remote control commander (hereinafter referred to as a remote controller) to select a key displayed on a menu screen. . Thereafter, the user performs an operation assigned to the selected key through the ok key. Each button has three states: normal state (non-selection state), selection state and execution state. The above three states of each key specify different graphic objects. Thus, the button image (shape and color) can change for each of the three states of the button. Users can easily distinguish the state of keys using different images.
此外,每个按键的三个状态可以指定不同的效果声音。例如,当用户选择一个按键时生成的效果声音指定到“选择状态”的按键图像。此外,当按键处于执行状态时生成的例如点击等效果声音指定到“执行状态”的按键图像。In addition, the three states of each key can assign different effect sounds. For example, an effect sound generated when a user selects a key is assigned to the key image of the "selected state". In addition, an effect sound such as a click generated when the key is in the execution state is assigned to the key image of the "execution state".
指定到按键“选择状态”的按键图像的效果声音关联到生成该效果声音的声音数据的标识符sound_id。当用户选择该按键时,关联到标识符sound_id的声音数据从播放器的存储器内读出,并且作为效果声音再现。类似地,指定到按键“执行状态”的按键图像的效果声音涉及生成该效果声音的声音数据的标识符sound_id。当用户选择按键并操作OK键时,按键变成执行状态。在这里,关联到“执行状态”的按键图像的声音效果的标识符sound_id的声音数据从播放器的存储器内读出,并且再现。The effect sound assigned to the key image of the key "selected state" is associated with the identifier sound_id of the sound data generating the effect sound. When the user selects this button, the sound data associated with the identifier sound_id is read out from the memory of the player, and reproduced as an effect sound. Similarly, the effect sound assigned to the key image of the key "execution state" refers to the identifier sound_id of the sound data generating the effect sound. When the user selects the key and operates the OK key, the key becomes the execution state. Here, the sound data of the identifier sound_id of the sound effect associated with the key image of the "execution state" is read from the memory of the player and reproduced.
命令组DispCmds(i)的显示控制命令(7)再现一个效果声音,其在play_sound(sound_id)格式中描述。命令play_sound(sound_id)再现由标识符sound_id标识的声音数据。当命令play_sound(sound_id)描述在命令组DispCmds(i)中时,在由命令execution_time(start_time)所指定的时间start_time再现由标识符sound_id标识的声音数据。The display control command (7) of the command group DispCmds(i) reproduces an effect sound described in the play_sound(sound_id) format. The command play_sound(sound_id) reproduces the sound data identified by the identifier sound_id. When the command play_sound(sound_id) is described in the command group DispCmds(i), the sound data identified by the identifier sound_id is reproduced at the time start_time specified by the command execution_time(start_time).
例如,当命令play_sound(sound_id)和命令fade_in(fade_in_time)以及命令fade_out(fade_out_time)一起使用时,在再现字幕和/清除字幕的同时再现作为效果声音的声音数据。图57示出了使用命令play_sound(sound_id)的一个例子。在图57所示的例子中,第一命令组DispCmds(0)、命令fade_in(2秒)使一个图形对象在开始时间[0]淡入两秒。命令play_sound(1)再现标识符sound_id[1]所标识的声音数据。此后,在命令组DispCmds(1)中,命令execution_time(800)在时间[800]改变显示颜色。命令play_sound(2)再现标识符sound_id[2]所标识的声音数据。在命令组DispCmds(2)中,命令execution_time(2000)和命令fade_out(1秒)使图形对象在时间[2000]淡出1秒。命令play_sound(1)再现标识符sound_id所标识的声音数据。For example, when the command play_sound(sound_id) is used together with the command fade_in(fade_in_time) and the command fade_out(fade_out_time), sound data as effect sound is reproduced while reproducing subtitles and/or clearing subtitles. Fig. 57 shows an example of using the command play_sound(sound_id). In the example shown in FIG. 57, the first command group DispCmds(0), command fade_in(2 seconds) causes a graphics object to fade in for two seconds at start time [0]. The command play_sound(1) reproduces the sound data identified by the identifier sound_id[1]. Thereafter, in the command group DispCmds(1), the command execution_time(800) changes the display color at time [800]. The command play_sound(2) reproduces the sound data identified by the identifier sound_id[2]. In the command group DispCmds(2), the command execution_time(2000) and the command fade_out(1 second) cause the graphics object to fade out at time [2000] for 1 second. The command play_sound(1) reproduces the sound data identified by the identifier sound_id.
以set_sound(PNG_image_id,sound_id)格式描述的命令(8),将一个效果声音指定到PNG数据。命令set_sound(PNG_image_id,sound_id)为由标识符PNG_image_id标识的PNG数据再现由标识符sound_id指定的声音数据。命令set_sound(PNG_image_id,sound_id)在当由标识符PNG_image_id标识的PNG数据显示时,再现由标识符PNG_image_id标识的声音数据。PNG数据的标识符PNG_image_id与图47所示的块PNGImageRegion()的PNG_image(i)的循环计数器i的值相同。The command (8) described in the format of set_sound(PNG_image_id, sound_id) specifies an effect sound to PNG data. The command set_sound(PNG_image_id, sound_id) reproduces the sound data specified by the identifier sound_id for the PNG data identified by the identifier PNG_image_id. The command set_sound(PNG_image_id, sound_id) reproduces the sound data identified by the identifier PNG_image_id when the PNG data identified by the identifier PNG_image_id is displayed. The identifier PNG_image_id of the PNG data is the same as the value of the loop counter i of the PNG_image(i) of the block PNGImageRegion() shown in FIG. 47 .
将命令set_sound(PNG_image_id,sound_id)用作选择状态和执行状态中按键的PNG数据。结果,当按键的正常状态改变到执行状态或反之,可以生成指定到PNG数据的作为效果声音的声音数据,该声音数据表示各个状态。除了这个例子,命令set_sound(PNG_image_id,sound_id)可以用在按键之外的其它PNG数据。Use the command set_sound(PNG_image_id, sound_id) as the PNG data of the key in the selection state and execution state. As a result, when the normal state of the key is changed to the execution state or vice versa, it is possible to generate sound data as effect sounds assigned to the PNG data, the sound data representing the respective states. Besides this example, the command set_sound(PNG_image_id, sound_id) can be used for other PNG data besides keys.
图58示出了图形对象200的数据结构的一个例子,图形对象200中声音数据被指定到按键图像。用于正常状态、选择状态和执行状态中的按键的PNG数据203A、203B和203C,描述在PNG数据区域203中。在图58所示的例子中,显示控制命令将坐标和声音数据指定到PNG数据。PNG数据的显示开始时间和按键的起始显示状态由外部脚本程序控制。因而,显示控制命令描述为执行时间[0]。FIG. 58 shows an example of the data structure of a
图58所示的图形对象200只描述了命令组DispCmds(0),其由命令execution_time(0)于[0]时间在显示控制命令表格202中执行。由于标识符PNG_image_id从[0]开始,标识符PNG_image_id[0]表示正常状态的PNG数据203A。标识符PNG_image_id[1]表示选择状态的PNG数据203B;标识符PNG_image_id[2]表示执行状态的PNG数据203C。The
当选择状态的按键的PNG数据203B由命令set_sound(1,10)显示时,其标识符PNG_image_id是[1],由标识符sound_id[10]标识的声音数据作为效果声音再现。类似地,当执行状态的按键的PNG数据203C由命令set_sound(2,11)显示时,其标识符PNG_image_id是[2],由标识符sound_id[11]标识的声音数据作为效果声音再现。When the
虽然图39中未示出,一个或多个类型的声音数据可以在播放器的外部存储器等存储器中预存储。例如,预备声音数据可以在播放器出货前预存储在其外部非易失性存储器等存储器中。Although not shown in FIG. 39, one or more types of sound data may be pre-stored in a memory such as an external memory of the player. For example, the preparatory sound data may be pre-stored in a memory such as an external non-volatile memory of the player before shipment.
可选地,作为效果声音的声音数据可以预记录在光盘上,其中已记录了图形对象200和作为影片数据的内容。当从光盘再现内容时,可以读出声音数据。作为在光盘上记录声音数据的一个方法,准备用于声音数据的一个文件。当从光盘再现内容时,预先读出文件并存储在播放器的存储器中。Alternatively, sound data as effect sound may be pre-recorded on an optical disc in which the
可选地,就像图形对象200,创建包括声音数据的PES包。PES包分割成TS包。TS包与片断AV流多路复用。Optionally, like graphics object 200, a PES packet including sound data is created. PES packets are divided into TS packets. TS packets are multiplexed with clip AV streams.
可选地,声音数据可以位于图形对象200的图形对象标题201。可选地,图形对象200中包含的一个PNG图像对应的声音数据,可以包括紧接在PNG图像数据区域203(图42A到图42C中未示出)之前的一个区域。Optionally, sound data may be located in the
在任何方法中,由于可以预先从光盘中读出声音数据,并且预存储在播放器的存储器中,当用PNG图像创建的一个按键的状态改变成选择状态或执行状态时,可以生成一个声音效果。声音数据指定了唯一的标识符sound_id,该声音数据可以唯一地被标识。In any method, since the sound data can be read out from the disc in advance and stored in the memory of the player, a sound effect can be generated when the state of a button created with a PNG image changes to the selected state or the executed state . The sound data is assigned a unique identifier sound_id, and the sound data can be uniquely identified.
2-14关于用于存储声音数据到光盘上的方法2-14 Regarding the method for storing sound data on an optical disc
有三种方法用于向光盘存储声音数据。接下来,将描述这三种方法。There are three methods for storing sound data to a disc. Next, these three methods will be described.
(1)图形对象200与声音数据多路复用。(1) The graphics object 200 is multiplexed with sound data.
(2)相应于标识符sound_id创建声音数据,声音数据不与片断AV流多路复用。(2) Sound data is created corresponding to the identifier sound_id, and the sound data is not multiplexed with the clip AV stream.
(3)为多个声音数据段创建数据文件,声音数据不与片断AV流多路复用。(3) A data file is created for a plurality of pieces of sound data, and the sound data is not multiplexed with the clip AV stream.
2-14a第一存储方法2-14a First storage method
接下来,参照图59A、图59B和图59C,(1)将详细描述将声音数据和图形对象200多路复用的方法(在下文中称作第一存储方法)。图59A和图59B示出了将声音数据添加到图形对象200并且与片断AV流多路复用的例子。Next, referring to FIGS. 59A, 59B, and 59C, (1) a method of multiplexing sound data and graphic objects 200 (hereinafter referred to as a first storage method) will be described in detail. 59A and 59B show an example in which sound data is added to the
图59A示出了安排在图形对象200的PNG数据区域203之后的声音数据区域204的一个例子。声音数据区域204包括多个声音数据204A、204B、...、204n。当声音数据204A、204B、...、204n分别对应于图形对象200的PNG数据203A、203B、...、203n时,可以容易地关联PNG图像和声音数据。FIG. 59A shows an example of the
声音数据204A、204B、...、204n可以是没有压缩编码的数据,例如AIFF(音频交互文件格式)或WAVE文件,或者是已压缩编码的数据,例如MP3(影片专家组1音频层3)、AAC(改进的音频编码)或者ATRAC(自适应转换音响编码)文件。当包括已压缩编码的声音数据时,播放器端应当具有与该压缩编码系统一致的音频解码器。The
图59B示出了对应于按键状态的声音数据包括在组成一个按键的图形对象200中。在这个例子中,声音数据204A-2和声音数据204B-2包含在声音数据区域203中,当按键位于选择状态时,再现声音数据204A-2,当按键位于执行状态时,再现声音数据204B-2。另一方面,PNG数据203A-2、203B-2和203C-2包含在PNG数据区域203中,上述数据是用于正常状态、选择状态和执行状态的按键。FIG. 59B shows that sound data corresponding to the key state is included in the
在这种情况下,声音数据区域204在用于按键图像的PNG数据区域203之后。声音数据区域204包含声音数据204A-2和声音数据204B-2,当按键位于选择状态时,再现声音数据204A-2,当按键位于执行状态时,再现声音数据204B-2。因而,当显示按键图像的PNG数据时,再现相应于按键状态的声音数据。由播放器再现的效果声音主要用作按键点击声音。因而,在上述结构中,可以充分地实现本发明的主要目的。In this case, the
图60示出了图形对象解码器模型240′的结构的例子,其中一个用于声音数据的处理系统添加到图44中所描述的图形对象解码器模型240。为了简单起见,在图60中与图44相同的部分用相同的数字标记,并省略它们的描述。FIG. 60 shows an example of the structure of a graphics object decoder model 240' in which a processing system for sound data is added to the graphics object
从端202输入作为MPEG TS的片断AV流,并且提供给PID滤波器110。片断AV流具有图形对象200,其包含声音数据。PID滤波器110从片断AV流中提取影片数据、声音数据和图形对象200。提取的图形对象200通过缓冲器TBn111B,提供给GOBJ剖析器224。该GOBJ剖析器224从图形对象200中读出图形对象标题201。GOBJ剖析器224根据图形对象标题201,从图形对象200中提取调色板数据,并根据图形对象标题201将图形对象200分割成显示控制命令表格202、PNG数据区域203和声音数据区域204。The clip AV stream as MPEG TS is input from the terminal 202 and supplied to the
调色板数据和显示控制命令表格202提供给命令处理器/图形分割器225。此外,声音数据区域204的声音数据204A、204B、...、204n提供给命令处理器/图形分割器225,并且存储在相应的缓冲器中(未示出)。Palette data and display control command table 202 are provided to command processor/
命令处理器/图形分割器225根据从GOBJ剖析器224提交的显示控制命令表格202中描述的显示控制命令,从缓冲器中读出声音数据,并输出声音数据。当包含在图形对象200中的声音数据204A、204B、...、204n已压缩编码时,命令处理器/图形分割器225对其解码,并且输出解码后的声音数据。The command processor/
从命令处理器/图形分割器225中输出的声音数据提供给音频混合器231,并且输出到表示处理器141。当另一个声音数据已输入音频混合器231时,该声音数据与这些声音数据以预定的比率混合,并且输出。The sound data output from the command processor/
图61所示的语法描述了图形对象200的结构的一个例子,其中图形对象200包含图59A和图59B所示的声音数据。在图47所示的结构中,块GraphicsObjectHeader()的域number_of_PNG_data之后是域number_of_sound_data。块SoundDataRegion()中存储的声音数据段的数量以8位的不小于0的整数表示。域start_address_of_sound_data(i)具有32位的数据长度,不小于0的整数,并且描述了i-th声音数据sound_data(i)从块GraphicsObject()以相应数量的字节开始的位置。块PNGImageRegion()之后是padding_word,之后是块SoundDataRegion()。作为数据Sound_data(i)的真实声音数据包含在块SoundDataRegion()中。The syntax shown in Fig. 61 describes an example of the structure of the
2-14b.第二存储方法2-14b. Second storage method
接下来,方法(2)用于相应于标识符sound_id创建声音数据,声音数据不与片断AV流多路复用(在下文中该方法称为第二存储方法)。例如,如图62所示,一个包含声音数据的目录SOUND位于目录BDAV之下。目录SOUND包含作为声音数据的PCM波形数据。例如,具有AIFF格式的声音数据文件“sound1.aiff”位于目录SOUND之下。当光盘最初装入播放器时,读出目录SOUND下的所有声音数据文件,并存储在播放器的外部存储器中。Next, the method (2) is used to create sound data corresponding to the identifier sound_id, the sound data not being multiplexed with the clip AV stream (hereinafter this method is referred to as a second storage method). For example, as shown in FIG. 62, a directory SOUND containing sound data is located under the directory BDAV. The directory SOUND contains PCM waveform data as sound data. For example, a sound data file "sound1.aiff" having an AIFF format is located under the directory SOUND. When the disc is initially loaded into the player, all sound data files under the directory SOUND are read out and stored in the external memory of the player.
声音数据的每段指定了唯一的标识符sound_id。脚本等从存储器中用标识符sound_id访问需要的声音数据。Each piece of sound data is assigned a unique identifier sound_id. The script or the like accesses necessary sound data from the memory using the identifier sound_id.
在这种情况下,如图59C所示,声音标识符区域205安排在图形对象200中。声音标识符数据205A和205B包含于声音标识符区域205中。在图59C表示的例子中,PNG数据203A203B、203C包含于PNG数据区域203,PNG数据205A、205B和205C分别对应于PNG数据区域203中的按键的正常状态、选择状态和执行状态。声音标识符数据205A、205B是分别对应于PNG数据203B和203C的标识符sound_id。当显示PNG数据203B时,再现对应于标识符sound_id的声音数据,标识符sound_id由存储在播放器的存储器中的声音标识符数据205A所表示。In this case, a
例如,如图58所示,PNG数据和声音数据可以根据显示控制命令表格202相关联。For example, PNG data and sound data can be associated according to the display control command table 202 as shown in FIG. 58 .
和图49A和图49B所示的显示控制命令不一样,由于声音数据是用标识符sound_id标识的,声音数据的效果声音可以在任何时间与显示的图形同步地生成。Unlike the display control commands shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B, since the sound data is identified with the identifier sound_id, the effect sound of the sound data can be generated synchronously with the displayed graphics at any time.
在这个方法中,由于声音数据是使用标识符sound_id从存储器读出的,效果声音的类型的数量是用标识符sound_id限制的。此外,可以使用的效果声音的类型的数量由播放器的外部存储器的容量限制。In this method, since the sound data is read from the memory using the identifier sound_id, the number of types of effect sounds is limited using the identifier sound_id. Also, the number of types of effect sounds that can be used is limited by the capacity of the player's external memory.
接下来,参照图63详细描述该方法。当装入光盘400时,播放器开始访问该光盘。从位于目录BDAV之下的目录SOUND读出声音数据。读出的声音数据(PCM数据)存储在播放器的外部存储器410中。在这里,为每段声音数据指定唯一的标识符sound_id。可选地,标识符sound_id可以添加到记录在光盘400的每段声音数据。Next, this method will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 63 . When the disc 400 is loaded, the player starts accessing the disc. Sound data is read from the directory SOUND located under the directory BDAV. The read sound data (PCM data) is stored in the external memory 410 of the player. Here, a unique identifier sound_id is assigned to each piece of sound data. Alternatively, an identifier sound_id may be added to each piece of sound data recorded on the optical disc 400 .
在这个例子中,从光盘400中读出16段的声音数据。标识符sound_id=1到16指定到声音数据的这些段。此外,得到声音数据的这些段的数据大小。在图63所示的例子中,假定图63所示的例子中指定到标识符sound_id=1到16的声音数据分别具有d1字节,d2字节,...,和d16字节的数据大小。In this example, 16 pieces of audio data are read from the optical disc 400 . Identifiers sound_id=1 to 16 are assigned to these segments of sound data. In addition, the data sizes of these segments of sound data are obtained. In the example shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that the sound data assigned to identifiers sound_id=1 to 16 in the example shown in FIG. 63 have data sizes of d1 byte, d2 byte, . . . , and d16 byte, respectively .
例如,在显示按键420A、420B和420C的菜单屏幕420上,当为按键420C执行一个操作时,从存储器410读出声音数据,其对应于指定到按键420C的标识符sound_id。在图63示出的例子中,对应于一个标识符sound_id=1的声音数据指定给按键420C。以预定的方式处理从存储器410读出的声音数据,并临时存储在缓冲器450B。此后,声音数据提供给音频混频器231。音频混频器231将声音数据与其它声音数据混合,所述其它声音数据联合有例如作为内容主要部分的影片数据,并且混合后的数据作为声音输出。For example, on menu screen 420 displaying buttons 420A, 420B, and 420C, when an operation is performed for button 420C, sound data corresponding to identifier sound_id assigned to button 420C is read out from memory 410 . In the example shown in FIG. 63, sound data corresponding to an identifier sound_id=1 is assigned to the button 420C. The audio data read out from the memory 410 is processed in a predetermined manner and temporarily stored in the buffer 450B. Thereafter, the sound data is supplied to the
缓冲器450A临时地存储声音数据,该声音数据与例如作为内容主要部分的影片数据相联合。当调整从缓冲器450A和450B中读出存储的声音数据时,对应于按键420C的一个效果声音在存储在缓冲器450A中的声音数据的适当时间从缓冲器450B输出。在这个例子中,用标识符sound_id=0指定no_sound数据再现模式。The buffer 450A temporarily stores sound data associated with, for example, movie data as a main part of the content. When adjusting to read out the stored sound data from the buffers 450A and 450B, an effect sound corresponding to the key 420C is output from the buffer 450B at an appropriate timing of the sound data stored in the buffer 450A. In this example, the no_sound data reproduction mode is designated with the identifier sound_id=0.
在上述模式中,可以从光盘400读出的声音数据的全部容量由存储器410的容量限制。此外,根据缓冲器450B的容量限制每段声音数据的容量。换句话说,当存储器410的容量由容量M(字节)表示,而且缓冲器B的容量由容量Dmax(字节)表示时,必须满足下面两个条件。In the above mode, the total capacity of sound data that can be read from the optical disc 400 is limited by the capacity of the memory 410 . In addition, the capacity of each piece of sound data is limited according to the capacity of the buffer 450B. In other words, when the capacity of the memory 410 is represented by the capacity M (bytes), and the capacity of the buffer B is represented by the capacity Dmax (bytes), the following two conditions must be satisfied.
(1)存储在存储器410中的每段声音数据的容量d1应该比缓冲器450B的容量Dmax小。(1) The capacity d1 of each piece of sound data stored in the memory 410 should be smaller than the capacity Dmax of the buffer 450B.
(2)存储在存储器410中的声音数据的全部容量(d1+d2+...+dn)应该比存储器410的容量M小。(2) The total capacity (d1+d2+...+dn) of the sound data stored in the memory 410 should be smaller than the capacity M of the memory 410.
换句话说,当条件(1)和(2)规定了播放器端和光盘制造者端的规则时,可以保持例如效果声音等声音数据的再现兼容性。In other words, when the conditions (1) and (2) specify rules on the player side and the disc manufacturer side, reproduction compatibility of sound data such as effect sound can be maintained.
如上所述,在声音数据没有与片断AV流多路复用的情况下(第二存储方法),当光盘最初装入播放器时,从中读出所有声音数据。然而,本发明并不限于这些例子。换句话说,可以分多次从光盘读出声音数据。例如,用作脚本部分之一的所有声音数据被读出并且存储在存储器中。在这里,抹去了存储器中脚本之前部分的声音数据。结果,即使脚本的声音数据的数据量超过了存储器的容量,也可以处理声音数据。As described above, in the case where the sound data is not multiplexed with the clip AV stream (the second storage method), when the disc is first loaded into the player, all the sound data is read therefrom. However, the present invention is not limited to these examples. In other words, audio data can be read out from the optical disc in multiple times. For example, all sound data used as one of the script parts is read out and stored in memory. Here, the sound data of the previous part of the script in the memory is erased. As a result, even if the data volume of the sound data of the scenario exceeds the capacity of the memory, the sound data can be processed.
所有声音数据都可以记录在光盘上的一个预定区域中。可选地,声音数据可以分别地记录在光盘上的多个区域中。当声音数据分别地记录在光盘上的多个区域中时,用于脚本某一部分的声音数据可以记录在光盘上相应于该脚本部分的位置。可选地,可以通过网络从服务器下载声音数据。All sound data can be recorded in a predetermined area on the disc. Alternatively, sound data may be recorded separately in a plurality of areas on the optical disc. When the sound data is separately recorded in a plurality of areas on the optical disc, the sound data for a certain part of the script may be recorded on the optical disc at a position corresponding to the script part. Alternatively, the sound data can be downloaded from a server via a network.
在用于将声音数据与片断AV流多路复用的方法中(第一存储方法),如图59A和图59B所示,不限制声音数据类型的数量。结果,声音数据的不同类型可以指定到每个图像。当必要时,声音数据和片断AV流一起提交。因而,任何提交片断AV流的时间,都可以使用声音数据的不同类型。此外,在第一存储方法中,由于从片断AV流中与图像数据一起读出声音数据,因此可以简单地构建阅读模型。此外,除了光盘的容量之外,不用限制声音数据文件的数量和文件的大小。In the method for multiplexing sound data with clip AV streams (first storage method), as shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B , the number of sound data types is not limited. As a result, different types of sound data can be assigned to each image. When necessary, sound data is submitted together with the clip AV stream. Thus, any time a clip AV stream is delivered, different types of sound data can be used. Furthermore, in the first storage method, since the audio data is read together with the image data from the clip AV stream, the reading model can be easily constructed. Furthermore, the number of sound data files and the file size are not limited except for the capacity of the disc.
然而,在第一方法中,当不同的图形对象使用相同的声音数据时,由于它们中每个的图形对象具有相同的声音数据,声音数据成为冗余的。此外,由于应当从图形对象中提取声音数据,在片断AV流信号分离后,声音数据应当从图形对象中分离。However, in the first method, when different graphic objects use the same sound data, since the graphic objects of each of them have the same sound data, the sound data becomes redundant. Furthermore, since the sound data should be extracted from the graphic object, after the clip AV stream signal is separated, the sound data should be separated from the graphic object.
2-14c第三存储模式2-14c The third storage mode
接下来,将描述用于创建多段声音数据的一个数据文件的方法(3),声音数据不与片断AV流多路复用(以下称为第三方法)。多段声音数据包含在例如文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”中。如图64所示,文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”位于文件的管理结构的目录BDAV下面,上述文件记录在图9所示的“蓝光光盘可擦写格式版本1.0第三部分”所确定的记录介质中。当光盘装入播放器时,初始访问并阅读文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”。在读出作为主要部分记录在光盘上的片断AV流(例如,一个影片)之前,文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”预装入播放器的存储器。Next, a method (3) for creating one data file of pieces of sound data that is not multiplexed with clip AV streams (hereinafter referred to as a third method) will be described. The pieces of sound data are contained in, for example, the file "HdmvSound.bdmv". As shown in Figure 64, the file "HdmvSound.bdmv" is located under the directory BDAV of the file management structure, and the above-mentioned files are recorded in the recording medium determined by "Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format Version 1.0 Part III" shown in Figure 9 . When the disc is loaded into the player, the file "HdmvSound.bdmv" is initially accessed and read. The file "HdmvSound.bdmv" is preloaded into the memory of the player before reading out a segmented AV stream (for example, a movie) recorded as a main part on an optical disc.
在图64中,位于目录STREAM之下的是作为光盘的主要内容的片断AV流。In Fig. 64, under the directory STREAM is the clip AV stream which is the main content of the disc.
图65所示的语法描述了文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”的一个例子。一个域length有32位的数据长度。该域length描述了在该域length之后到文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”的结束的字节长度。域data_block_start_address具有32位的数据长度。域data_block_start_address描述了文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”中用于声音数据的块data_block的开始字节的开始地址。域number_of_sound_entries具有8位的字节长度。域number_of_sound_entries描述了包含在文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”中的声音数据段(也就是效果声音数据)的数量。The syntax shown in Fig. 65 describes an example of the file "HdmvSound.bdmv". A field length has a data length of 32 bits. This field length describes the byte length to the end of the file "HdmvSound.bdmv" after this field length. The field data_block_start_address has a data length of 32 bits. The field data_block_start_address describes the start address of the start byte of the block data_block for sound data in the file "HdmvSound.bdmv". The field number_of_sound_entries has a byte length of 8 bits. The field number_of_sound_entries describes the number of pieces of sound data (that is, effect sound data) contained in the file "HdmvSound.bdmv".
自变量for循环自动指定了一个标识符sound_id,其指示一段声音数据。for循环描述了声音数据的信息,该声音数据指示到相应于该自变量的标识符sound_id。The argument for loop automatically specifies an identifier sound_id indicating a piece of sound data. The for loop describes information of the sound data indicated to the identifier sound_id corresponding to the argument.
块attributes()描述了声音数据的属性。域channel_assignment描述了声音数据的通道指定。域channel_assignment描述了一个属性,例如非立体声或双道立体声。域sampling_frequency描述了声音数据的采样频率,例如48kHz。域bits_per_sample描述了声音数据的量化器位数,例如16位。The block attributes() describes the attributes of the sound data. The field channel_assignment describes the channel assignment of sound data. The field channel_assignment describes an attribute such as monaural or binaural. The field sampling_frequency describes the sampling frequency of the sound data, eg 48kHz. The field bits_per_sample describes the number of quantizer bits of the sound data, for example 16 bits.
域sound_data_start_address具有32位的数据长度。域sound_data_start_address描述了for循环中声音数据的开始字节的块data_block的开始地址,该声音数据涉及域sound_id。域sound_data_length具有32位的数据长度。域sound_data_length描述了声音数据的字节长度。在for循环后,通过插入字处置块data_block。块data_block是声音数据实际上位于其中的一个区域。The field sound_data_start_address has a data length of 32 bits. The field sound_data_start_address describes the start address of the block data_block of the start bytes of the sound data referred to in the field sound_id in the for loop. The field sound_data_length has a data length of 32 bits. The field sound_data_length describes the byte length of sound data. After the for loop, the block data_block is processed by inserting the word. The block data_block is an area in which the sound data is actually located.
图66示出了根据上述语法的文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”的结构。从该文件的开始到域number_of_sound_entries的一个区域称为标题部分600。该标题部分600之后是for循环部分601,之后是声音数据部分602。Fig. 66 shows the structure of the file "HdmvSound.bdmv" according to the above syntax. An area from the beginning of the file to the field number_of_sound_entries is called header section 600 . This header section 600 is followed by a for loop section 601 and then a sound data section 602 .
位于声音数据部分602的声音数据由标识符sound_id=1到标识符sound_id=n指示。例如,特定声音数据的结束和下一个声音数据的开始在字节边界相联接。类似地,标识符sound_id=1到标识符sound_id=n所指示的声音数据是连续地排列的。在声音数据部分602中,用for循环部分601中的域sound_data_start_address指定开始地址,上述for循环部分601的自变量对应于标识符sound_id。一个区域来自由for循环的域sound_data_length所指定的指定地址,该区域称为对应于循环的自变量的标识符sound_id的声音数据。The sound data located in the sound data section 602 are indicated by identifier sound_id=1 to identifier sound_id=n. For example, the end of a certain sound data and the start of the next sound data are joined on a byte boundary. Similarly, the sound data indicated by the identifier sound_id=1 to the identifier sound_id=n are consecutively arranged. In the sound data section 602, the start address is specified with the field sound_data_start_address in the for loop section 601 whose argument corresponds to the identifier sound_id. An area from the specified address specified by the field sound_data_length of the for loop is called sound data corresponding to the identifier sound_id of the argument of the loop.
图67示出了根据第三存储方法的效果声音的再现的应用图像的例子。为了简单起见,在图67中,与图63相似的部分用相同的图标记标识,并省略了它们的描述。当光盘装入播放器时,最初访问光盘400,并且从光盘400中读出(预载)位于目录BDAV之下的文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”。读出的文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”存储在播放器的外部存储器410中。FIG. 67 shows an example of an application image for reproduction of effect sound according to the third storage method. For simplicity, in FIG. 67, parts similar to those in FIG. 63 are identified by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted. When the disc is loaded into the player, the disc 400 is initially accessed, and the file "HdmvSound.bdmv" located under the directory BDAV is read out (preloaded) from the disc 400 . The read file "HdmvSound.bdmv" is stored in the external memory 410 of the player.
如图66所示,根据地址信息和数据长度信息,指定文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”的循环部分601中每个数据段。每个数据段是用相应的标识符sound_id标识。在图67所示的例子中,文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”包含m段声音数据。标识符sound_id=1,2,...,和m指定到m段声音数据。每段声音数据的容量是使用对应于标识符sound_id的数据长度信息和量化器位的数量bit_per_sample而得到的。As shown in FIG. 66, each data segment in the loop portion 601 of the file "HdmvSound.bdmv" is specified based on address information and data length information. Each data segment is identified with a corresponding identifier sound_id. In the example shown in FIG. 67, the file "HdmvSound.bdmv" contains m pieces of sound data. Identifiers sound_id=1, 2, . . . , and m are assigned to m pieces of sound data. The capacity of each piece of sound data is obtained using data length information corresponding to the identifier sound_id and the number of quantizer bits bit_per_sample.
在这个例子中,假定声音数据已根据PCM系统解码。然而,本发明不限于上述例子。声音数据可以已根据例如MPEG1音频层3(mp3)系统、AAC(改进的音频编码)系统或者ATRAC(自适应转换音响编码)系统而压缩解码,并且存储在声音数据部分602。在这种情况中,每段声音数据位于声音数据部分602的方式是,每段声音数据的结束部分连接到下一段声音数据的开始部分。In this example, it is assumed that the sound data has been decoded according to the PCM system. However, the present invention is not limited to the above examples. The sound data may have been compression-decoded according to, for example, the MPEG1 audio layer 3 (mp3) system, the AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) system, or the ATRAC (Adaptive Transform Acoustic Coding) system, and stored in the sound data section 602 . In this case, each piece of sound data is located in the sound data section 602 in such a manner that the end of each piece of sound data is connected to the beginning of the next piece of sound data.
例如,假定菜单屏幕420显示按键420A、420B、420C。在菜单屏幕420上,按键420C由按键图像状态设置430组成,该状态具有按键图像420C-1、420C-2和420C-3,它们分别表示正常状态、选择状态和执行状态。当按键图像根据上述三个状态改变时,用户可以容易地分辨这些状态。在图67所示的例子中,标识符sound_id=2的声音数据指定到选择状态的按键图像420C-2。标识符sound_id=2的声音数据指定到执行状态的按键图像420C-3。当标识符sound_id的值是“0”时,不输出声音数据。For example, assume that menu screen 420 displays buttons 420A, 420B, 420C. On the menu screen 420, a key 420C is composed of a key image state setting 430 having key images 420C-1, 420C-2, and 420C-3 representing a normal state, a selection state, and an execution state, respectively. When the key image changes according to the above three states, the user can easily distinguish these states. In the example shown in FIG. 67, the sound data with the identifier sound_id=2 is assigned to the key image 420C-2 in the selected state. The sound data with the identifier sound_id=2 is assigned to the key image 420C- 3 in the execution state. When the value of the identifier sound_id is "0", sound data is not output.
当用户用远程控制器操作按键420C以改变选择状态到执行状态时,按键的图像从按键图像420C-2改变到按键图像420C-3。此外,从外部存储器410读出指定到按键图像420C-3的标识符sound_id=1,并且再现。When the user operates the key 420C with the remote controller to change the selection state to the execution state, the image of the key changes from the key image 420C-2 to the key image 420C-3. Also, the identifier sound_id=1 assigned to the key image 420C- 3 is read out from the external memory 410 and reproduced.
换句话说,显示了按键图像420C-3。此外,根据用于标识符sound_id=1的地址信息和数据长度信息,访问存储器410,标识符sound_id=1与按键图像420C-3相关联,并且从存储器410中读出标识符sound_id=1的声音数据。从存储器410中读出的声音数据临时存储在缓冲器450B,并且提供给音频混频器231。音频混频器231将从存储器410中读出的声音数据与另一个声音数据混合,并且输出混合后的数据,上述另一个声音数据是从缓冲器450A输出的内容主要部分的影片数据。In other words, the button image 420C-3 is displayed. In addition, based on the address information and data length information for the identifier sound_id=1, the memory 410 is accessed, the identifier sound_id=1 is associated with the button image 420C-3, and the sound with the identifier sound_id=1 is read out from the memory 410 data. The sound data read out from the memory 410 is temporarily stored in the buffer 450B, and supplied to the
类似于图63中所示的第二存储方法,第三存储方法中,根据存储器410的容量和缓冲器450B的容量,限制从光盘400读出的声音数据的全部容量以及每段声音数据的容量。Similar to the second storage method shown in FIG. 63, in the third storage method, according to the capacity of the memory 410 and the capacity of the buffer 450B, the total capacity of the sound data read from the optical disc 400 and the capacity of each segment of sound data are limited. .
接下来,将描述根据本发明第三存储方法的图形对象的结构。在第三存储方法中,按键图像使用图形平面12组成了图形用户界面(GUI),将按键图像作为一个流解码。此后,按键图像与之组合的流称为交互图形流。Next, the structure of a graphics object according to the third storage method of the present invention will be described. In the third storage method, the key image composes a Graphical User Interface (GUI) using the
例如,图67所示的菜单屏幕420,按键420A、420B和420C的按键图像组合为交互图形流700(见图68)并解码。当例如按键420C的一个按键是由按键图像设置430组成时,该按键图像设置430具有多个按键图像数据420C-1、420C-2和420C-3,它们与按键420A和420B的按键图像数据一起,作为交互图形流700而解码。该交互图形流700与传送流多路复用,并且记录在光盘上。For example, the menu screen 420 shown in FIG. 67, the button images of the buttons 420A, 420B, and 420C are combined into an interactive graphics stream 700 (see FIG. 68) and decoded. When a key such as the key 420C is composed of the key image set 430, the key image set 430 has a plurality of key image data 420C-1, 420C-2, and 420C-3, which together with the key image data of the keys 420A and 420B , decoded as an interactive graphics stream 700 . This interactive graphics stream 700 is multiplexed with the transport stream and recorded on an optical disc.
图68A和图68B示出了交互图形700的例子。如图68A所示,该交互图形流700具有一个交互成分程序段701和一个或更多按键图像数据段702,702,...等。这些按键图像数据702,702,...等指定不同的标识符object_id。上述按键图像数据702的这些段称为标识符object_id。按键图像数据702,702,...等的上述段是由根据例如长度解码方法,对例如位映象图像数据解码而得到的。68A and 68B illustrate examples of interactive graphics 700 . As shown in FIG. 68A, the interactive graphic flow 700 has an interactive component program segment 701 and one or more key image data segments 702, 702, . . . and so on. These key image data 702, 702, . . . etc. designate different identifiers object_id. These segments of the above-mentioned key image data 702 are called identifier object_id. The above-mentioned segments of key image data 702, 702, .
如图68B所示,交互图形流700位于指定给相同PID的多个传送包的有效载荷中。传送包作为传送流而多路复用。As shown in FIG. 68B, interactive graphics stream 700 resides in the payloads of multiple transfer packets assigned to the same PID. Transport packets are multiplexed as a transport stream.
图69示出了交互成分程序段701的结构的一个例子。交互成分程序段701是由程序段描述属性、显示时间属性、按键设计和一个命令组成的。程序段描述属性和显示时间属性描述了按键的显示属性和在交互位置程序段701中确定的显示时间的属性信息。FIG. 69 shows an example of the structure of the interactive component program segment 701. The interactive component program segment 701 is composed of program segment description attribute, display time attribute, button design and a command. The program segment description attribute and the display time attribute describe the display attribute of the button and the attribute information of the display time determined in the interaction position program segment 701 .
按键设计和命令描述了一个或更多按键信息703,703,...等,其组成了像GUI这样的菜单屏幕。在按键信息703中,域button_number描述了标识符button_number,该标识符标识了每个按键。每个按键都被标识,并且涉及标识符button_number。域selected_state_sound_id描述了标识符button_number,该标识符涉及和“选择状态”的按键图像相关的声音数据。域activated_state_sound_id描述了标识符sound_id,该标识符涉及与“执行状态”的按键图像相关的声音数据。如图70所示,域neibour_info描述了屏幕上与这个按键临近的按键号码Upper_button_number、Lower_button_number、Left_button_number和Right_button_number。The key design and command describe one or more
域Normal_state_object_id描述了当按键在“正常状态(非选择状态)”时涉及的按键图像的标识符object_id。域selected_state_sound_id描述了当按键在“选择状态”时,涉及的按键图像的标识符object_id。域activated_state_sound_id描述了当按键在“执行状态”时,涉及的按键图像的标识符object_id。域命令描述了指定到一个执行状态的按键的操作信息。The field Normal_state_object_id describes the identifier object_id of the key image involved when the key is in the "normal state (non-selection state)". The field selected_state_sound_id describes the identifier object_id of the button image involved when the button is in the "selected state". The field activated_state_sound_id describes the identifier object_id of the button image involved when the button is in the "activated state". Field commands describe the operation information of a key assigned to an execution state.
2-15另一个平面的例子2-15 Another plane example
在上述例子中,如图20、图21、图22所示,对于图形平面12,可以选择YCbCr(4:4:4)或RGB(4:4:4)作为颜色系统。然而,本发明不限于这些例子。换句话说,如图71所示,可以主要地为按键的位映象数据确定图形平面12′。如图72所示,类似字幕平面11,图形平面12′可以由1920像素×1080行组成,每个像素的采样深度是8位,颜色系统使用256色和8位颜色位映象地址的调色板。In the above example, as shown in FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , and FIG. 22 , for the
在这种情况下,影片平面10、字幕平面11和图形平面12′是由图73中所示的结构组成的。为了简单起见,在图73中,与图22中相似的部分用相同的图标记表示,并且省略它们的描述。In this case, the
图形平面12′的图像数据输入到调色板26A,并且作为RGB(4:4:4)的颜色数据输出。当为图像数据指定了α混合的不透明度时,指定的不透明度α2(0≤α2≤1)从调色板表格26A输出。调色板表格26A的输入数据和输出数据以及存储在调色板表格26A中的调色板数据,与图23和图24中所示的都相同。因此,将省略对它们的描述。Image data of the graphics plane 12' is input to the
从调色板表格26A输出的RGB数据提供给RGB/YCbCr转换电路26B,并且转换成YCbCr数据,作为影片数据的统一数据。YCbCr数据从RGB/YCbCr转换电路26B中输出,并输入到乘法装置27。The RGB data output from the palette table 26A is supplied to the RGB/
当用在图形平面12′中的图像数据是根据PNG格式的数据时,可以为图像数据的每个像素设置不透明度数据α2(0≤α2≤1)。不透明度数据α2提供给乘法装置27。该乘法装置27将YCbCr数据的亮度信号Y色差数据Cb和Cr与不透明度数据α2相乘,该YCbCr数据是从RGB/YCbCr转换电路26B中输出的。乘法装置27的相乘结果输入到加法装置28的一个输入端。不透明度数据α2的补数,也就是(1-α2)提供给乘法装置25。When the image data used in the graphics plane 12' is data according to the PNG format, opacity data α2 (0≤α2≤1) may be set for each pixel of the image data. The opacity data α2 is supplied to the multiplying means 27 . The multiplying means 27 multiplies the luminance signal Y color difference data Cb and Cr of the YCbCr data output from the RGB/
2-16关于解码器模型的另一个例子2-16 Another example on the decoder model
图74示出了播放器解码器100′的结构的例子,其中用于图形对象200和图形平面12′的颜色系统的一个声音数据处理提供给图39所示的播放器解码器100,上述图形平面12′具有256色调色板,使用8位颜色位映象地址。为了简单起见,在图74中,与图39相似的部分用相同的图标记标识,并且省略对它们的描述。FIG. 74 shows an example of the structure of the player decoder 100', wherein a sound data process for the color system of the
没有与片断AV流多路复用的声音数据作为例如输入通道(1)的数据输入到输入端101。其后,声音数据通过开关电路102和103提供给内容缓冲器105。另一方面,片断AV流输入到输入端202,上述片断AV流的声音数据已与一个图形对象200多路复用。PID滤波器110从该片断AV流中分离图形对象200,并且将图形对象200临时存储在缓冲器TBn111A中。其后,图形对象200通过开关电路103提供给内容缓冲器105。Sound data that is not multiplexed with the clip AV stream is input to the
不包含声音数据的图形对象200与片断AV流多路复用,并且提供给输入端202。PID滤波器110从片断AV流中分离组成图形对象200的传送包。该传送包临时地存储在缓冲器TBn111B,或缓冲器TBn111C。存储在缓冲器TBn111B中的传送包提供给缓冲器TBn112B。根据PID标题收集图形对象图形对象200。该图形对象200通过开关电路107提供给图形解码器A500。从存储在缓冲器Bn111C的传送包,通过缓冲器Bn112C收集图形对象200。通过开关电路108将图形对象200提供给图形解码器B501。The
图形解码器A500和B501从提交的传送包消除标题信息、位于传送包中的解码信息数据和用于字幕或图形的位映象数据的图像数据。The graphics decoders A500 and B501 eliminate header information, decoded information data located in the transport packet, and image data for subtitles or bitmap data of graphics from the delivered transport packet.
另一方面,从内容缓冲器105读出位于图形对象200中的图像数据,该图形对象200包含声音数据。图像数据分别通过开关电路107和108,提供给图形解码器A500和B501。On the other hand, image data located in a
在图74所示的例子中,图形解码器A500对PNG格式图像数据进行解码。相反,图形解码器B501对JPEG格式图像数据进行解码。图形解码器A500和B501可以解码其它格式图像数据。可选地,图形解码器A500和B501可以解码不同格式的图像数据。In the example shown in FIG. 74, the graphics decoder A500 decodes PNG format image data. In contrast, the graphics decoder B501 decodes JPEG format image data. Graphics decoders A500 and B501 can decode other format image data. Optionally, the graphics decoders A500 and B501 can decode image data in different formats.
图像解码器A500的一个输出提供给开关电路130的一个输入端130B和开关电路131的一个输入端131B,随后通过开关电路130和130,分别提供给子画面平面502和图形平面503。An output of the image decoder A500 is supplied to an
多介质引擎106具有声音播放器106D,其结构如图39所示。缓冲器109具有声音缓冲器109E,其结构如图39所示。声音播放器106D解码通过声音缓冲器109E,从内容缓冲器105中读出的声音数据,得到解码后的声音数据,作为例如线性PCM音频数据,并将其输出。从声音播放器106D中输出的声音数据提供给表示处理器141。表示处理器141将从声音播放器106D提交的声音数据与另一个声音数据相混合,并且输出混合后的声音数据到输出端142。上述另一个声音数据是和从音频解码器118提交的数据一起从声音播放器106D提交的。The
声音数据作为效果声音,例如当点击按键图像时的点击声音,由声音播放器106D再现上述声音数据。该声音数据存储在声音缓冲器109E中,由声音播放器106D再现。声音播放器106D执行一个再现程序,作为例如用于声音数据的软件。The sound data is reproduced by the sound player 106D as an effect sound such as a click sound when a button image is clicked. This audio data is stored in the
多介质引擎106读出存储在例如编码缓冲器104中的ECMA脚本,分析ECMA脚本,从编码缓冲器104中读出另一个ECMA脚本和HTML文档,并且从内容缓冲器105中读出图像数据和音频数据。声音数据可以和其它数据一样存储在内容缓冲器105中。The
此外,多介质引擎106接收来自远程控制器、点击装置等的用户命令,并且处理该命令。多介质引擎106根据用户命令的处理结果和每个脚本,生成控制信号。该控制信号提供给图形解码器A500和B501、音频解码器118、MPEG视频解码器120和系统解码器121。Furthermore, the
由图形分割器106C处理的图像数据通过开关电路130和131,分别提供给子画面平面502,和图形平面503。子画面平面502和图形平面503是由例如帧存储器组成的。子画面平面502和图形平面503分别对应于图71所示的字幕平面11和图形平面12′。The image data processed by the graphics divider 106C are supplied to the
在这个例子中,假定从图形分割器106C提供给子画面平面502和图形平面503的图像数据是位映象数据,其中图像数据是例如PNG格式或FPEG格式那样,由图形分割器106C解码。In this example, it is assumed that the image data supplied from the graphics divider 106C to the
此外,多介质引擎106将一个控制信号提供给表示处理器139,该控制信号导致子画面平面502、图形平面503和影片平面135转换到另一个平面。多介质引擎106将一个控制信号提供给表示处理器141,该控制信号控制音频流的输出。In addition,
子画面平面502上的图像数据是相应于图73所示的调色板22提供给一个调色板504。256色调色板由一个索引指示。结果,输出RGB数据和不透明度数据α1。RGB数据提供给转换电路506,它对应于图73所示的RGB/YCbCr转换电路29。结果,图像数据的颜色系统从RGB(4:4:4)转换到YCbCr(4:4:4)。从RGB/YCbCr转换电路506输出的YCbCr数据提供给表示处理器139。Image data on the
图形平面503上的图像数据提供给相应于图73所示的调色板表格26A的调色板505。256色调色板由一个索引指示。结果,输出RGB数据和不透明度数据α2。RGB数据提供给转换电路507,它对应于图73所示的RGB/YCbCr转换电路26B。结果,图像数据的颜色系统从RGB(4:4:4)转换到YCbCr(4:4:4)。从RGB/YCbCr转换电路507输出的YCbCr数据提供给表示处理器139。Image data on the
此外,影片平面135上的影片数据通过上/下转换器138提供给表示处理器139。In addition, the movie data on the
如上所示,表示处理器139执行一个α混合处理,该处理使用字幕平面11(子画面平面502)上的图像数据的不透明度α1和字幕平面12′(图形平面503)上的图像数据的不透明度α2。该处理混合影片平面10上的图像数据、字幕平面11上的图像数据和图形平面12′上的图像数据。表示处理器139可以为图像数据在实时中执行一个效果处理。将混合了平面的图像数据,提供给输出端140。平面中已执行了效果处理。As shown above, the
2-17.另一个解码器模型的例子2-17. Another decoder model example
图75示出了根据用于声音数据的第三存储方法的播放器解码器100″的结构的例子。为了简单起见,在图75中与图39和图74相似的部分用相同的图标记来标识,并且省略对它们的描述。如上所述,在用于声音数据的第三存储方法中,多段声音数据和相应于按键状态的效果声音包含在一个文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”中,该文件处于目录BDAV之下。当最初访问光盘时,读出文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”并存储在播放器的存储器中。Fig. 75 has shown the example according to the structure of the
作为播放器的内部存储器,可以使用缓冲器109的声音缓冲器109E。例如,当最初访问光盘时,读出的声音数据从端101输入。该声音数据通过开关电路102和内容缓冲器105,提供给声音缓冲器109E。当执行存储在编码缓冲器104中的程序码时,从声音缓冲器109E中读出必要的声音数据,该数据从端710输入。As the internal memory of the player, the
作为MPEG ES从端202输入的实时流提供给PID滤波器110。当传送包的PID表示其包含了交互图形流700时,该传送流临时存储在缓冲器111A中。在合适的时间读出该传送流,并输入到选择了输入端103B的开关电路103,并且通过开关电路103存储在内容缓冲器105中。A real-time stream input as an
交互图形流700的交互成分程序段701是从内容缓冲器105中读出,并提供给多介质引擎106。此外,按键图像数据702,702,...是从内容缓冲器501中读出,并且通过开关电路108提供给图形解码器B501。The interactive component program segment 701 of the interactive graphics stream 700 is read from the
从端710输入的声音数据临时地存储在缓冲器711中。混频器712混合将端710提交的声音数据和另一个声音数据混合,并将混合后的声音数据提供给表示处理器141,上述另一个声音数据是在预定的混频比率从音频解码器118提交上来的。在相应于用户输入,在声音播放器106D的控制下,混频器712的混频比率可以在播放器解码器100″端设置。Sound data input from the terminal 710 is temporarily stored in the buffer 711 . The
在图75中,为了方便起见,缓冲器711与混频器712是分离的。然而,实际上,缓冲器711和混频器712构建在表示处理器141中。因而,考虑与图67所示的结构的联系,缓冲器711相应于缓冲器450B,混频器712相应于音频混频器231。图67所示的缓冲器450A构建在表示处理器141中。In FIG. 75, the buffer 711 and the
当声音数据已压缩编码并且记录在光盘上时,从光盘上读出的声音数据解码为线性PCM音频数据,并且存储在缓冲器711中。例如,声音播放器106D对光盘读出的压缩编码声音数据进行解码,并且存储解码后的声音数据到声音缓冲器109E。声音数据可以由音频解码器118解码。可选地,声音数据也可由软件解码。When sound data has been compression-encoded and recorded on an optical disc, the sound data read from the optical disc is decoded into linear PCM audio data and stored in the buffer 711 . For example, the sound player 106D decodes the compression-coded sound data read from the optical disk, and stores the decoded sound data in the
在上述例子中,图75所示的解码器中,在例如记录在光盘上的影片的内容再现之前,从光盘预装入作为效果声音的声音数据,并且存储在播放器解码器的内部存储器中。当使用图67所示的目录和文件结构时,只有作为效果声音的、用于声音数据的文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”可以存在于目录BDMV中。当播放器最初访问光盘时,播放器预装入用于效果声音的声音数据文件到播放器的内部存储器。In the above-mentioned example, in the decoder shown in FIG. 75, before the content reproduction of, for example, a film recorded on the optical disc, the sound data as the effect sound is preloaded from the optical disc and stored in the internal memory of the player decoder. . When using the directory and file structure shown in FIG. 67, only the file "HdmvSound.bdmv" for sound data as effect sound can exist in the directory BDMV. When the player initially accesses the disc, the player preloads sound data files for effect sounds into the player's internal memory.
除了这个例子,如图76所示,可以认为播放列表是由用于再现效果声音的数据实现的。在这种情况中,通过例如图15所示的子播放项目,可以访问要再现的声音数据,该数据是作为指定给按键的效果声音。例如,在子播放项目中描述用于声音数据的一个文件名(文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”)。Except for this example, as shown in FIG. 76, it can be considered that the play list is realized by data for reproducing effect sounds. In this case, through, for example, the sub play item shown in FIG. 15, it is possible to access the sound data to be reproduced as the effect sound assigned to the key. For example, a file name (file "HdmvSound.bdmv") for sound data is described in the SubPlayItem.
可选地,作为用于为文件添加参考信息的方法,可以使用图14所示的块UIAppInfoPlayList(),上述文件包含作为效果声音的声音数据。在这种情况中,用于文件名“HdmvSound.bdmv”的一个域可以添加到块UIAppInfoPlayList()的语法中。Alternatively, as a method for adding reference information to a file containing sound data as effect sound, a block UIAppInfoPlayList() shown in FIG. 14 may be used. In this case, a field for the filename "HdmvSound.bdmv" can be added to the syntax of the block UIAppInfoPlayList().
在再现一个播放列表之前,播放器将一个作为效果声音的声音数据预先装入到外部存储器,该声音数据由一个文件的参考信息指示(例如,子播放项目),该文件包括作为效果声音的声音数据。Before reproducing a playlist, the player preloads into the external memory a sound data as an effect sound indicated by reference information (for example, sub play item) of a file including a sound as an effect sound data.
图77示出了相应于另一个解码器模式的文件的管理结构的例子。在图77所示的例子中,在目录STEAM下,有作为效果声音的用于声音数据的文件“HdmvSound01.bdmv”、“HdmvSound02.bdmv”等。上述文件“HdmvSound01.bdmv”、“HdmvSound02.bdmv”等与图65、图66中的文件“HdmvSound.bdmv”相比,相同的结构,只不过声音数据置于数据部分602之中。因而,用于作为效果声音的声音数据的多个文件可以记录在光盘上。用一个作为效果声音(例如,子播放项目或作为播放列表属性信息的块UIAppInfoPlayList())的声音数据文件的参考信息,可以指示用于声音数据的文件,。在这个例子中,作为效果声音的声音数据的类型可以为每个播放列表而改变。Fig. 77 shows an example of the management structure of files corresponding to another decoder mode. In the example shown in FIG. 77, under the directory STEAM, there are files "HdmvSound01.bdmv", "HdmvSound02.bdmv" and the like for sound data as sound effects. The above-mentioned files "HdmvSound01.bdmv", "HdmvSound02.bdmv", etc. have the same structure as the files "HdmvSound.bdmv" in Fig. 65 and Fig. Thus, a plurality of files for sound data as effect sounds can be recorded on the optical disc. A file for sound data can be indicated with reference information of a sound data file as effect sound (for example, sub play item or block UIAppInfoPlayList() as playlist attribute information). In this example, the type of sound data as effect sound can be changed for each playlist.
3.本发明的第二模式3. The second mode of the present invention
接下来,将描述本发明的第二模式。根据本发明的第一模式,使用ECMA脚本和HTML文档描述一个再现程序,其用于再现光盘上数据。相反,根据第二模式,用原始数据结构和描述语言而不是ECMA脚本和HTML文档来描述一个再现程序。在本发明第二模式中使用的脚本描述语言在用于DVD视频的调整导航命令的基础上,确定一个最初显示控制命令的命令组。因而,根据本发明的第二模式,可以为蓝光光盘显示比第一模式更加适合并且灵活的菜单屏幕。Next, a second mode of the present invention will be described. According to the first mode of the present invention, a reproduction program for reproducing data on an optical disc is described using ECMA script and HTML document. On the contrary, according to the second mode, a reproduction program is described with original data structure and description language instead of ECMA script and HTML document. The script description language used in the second mode of the present invention determines a command group to initially display control commands on the basis of adjustment navigation commands for DVD-Video. Thus, according to the second mode of the present invention, it is possible to display a more suitable and flexible menu screen for the Blu-ray disc than the first mode.
3-1.关于脚本3-1. About the script
根据本发明的第二模式,由于使用了最初确定脚本描述语言,不必要确定与第一模式中使用的ECMA脚本不同的事件句柄。例如,由于最初确定的脚本描述语言可以要执行脚本所必需的预先确定事件,不需在程序中确定脚本的事件。According to the second mode of the present invention, since the initially determined script description language is used, it is not necessary to determine an event handler different from the ECMA script used in the first mode. For example, since the initially determined script description language may require predetermined events necessary to execute the script, there is no need to determine the events of the script in the program.
由于使用了最初确定脚本描述语言,图26所示的脚本的外部结构不需要整体事件句柄定义71和局部事件句柄定义72。图78示出了根据本发明第二模式描述的脚本70′。播放列表73A描述为脚本70′的开始的进入播放列表,其在光盘装入播放器后最先执行。当屏幕上发出了预定命令时,再现播放列表73B。再现播放列表73B后,再现播放列表73C。在图78所示的例子中,当再现播放列表73C时,读出图形数据74A,并且显示菜单屏幕80A,其提示用户选择故事的一个分支。Since the initially determined script description language is used, the external structure of the script shown in FIG. 26 does not require the overall event handler definition 71 and the local event handler definition 72 . Fig. 78 shows a script 70' described according to the second mode of the present invention.
其后,如第一模式的图26所示,再现脚本70′。当在播放列表中设置一个标志时,播放列表的一个分支或组合处可以在该标志处实现。Thereafter, as shown in Fig. 26 of the first mode, the scenario 70' is reproduced. When a flag is set in the playlist, a branch or combination of the playlist can be implemented at the flag.
每个播放列表具有一系列命令(一个程序),用于一些操作,当检测到一个标志、用户的输入或者播放器的再现改变时,执行上述操作。播放器执行要实现上述操作的程序。Each playlist has a series of commands (a program) for operations that are performed when a flag, user's input, or player's reproduction change is detected. The player executes a program to realize the above operations.
即使正在再现脚本70′的播放列表73A到73M中的任一个,当按下远程控制命令器的菜单按键时,显示用于脚本的列表的菜单屏幕60(见图25)。接下来,将描述为菜单屏幕60再现一个播放列表的处理。在这种情况下,当远程控制命令器的菜单按键被按下时,执行一个事件(菜单按键“on”事件),一个命令作为与该事件相应的事件句柄,上述命令将用于要显示的菜单屏幕60的播放列表描述为一个脚本。Even if any one of the
3-2.脚本目录3-2. Script directory
在目录BDVM中确定一个脚本。一个脚本由一个或多个播放列表组成。将参照图79、图80A、图80B和图80C描述脚本的目录。基于播放列表的连接,脚本的结构可以大致分为三类:(1)单个播放列表,(2)连续的播放列表,(3)如图79所示的多个播放列表。Define a script in the directory BDVM. A scenario consists of one or more playlists. The contents of scripts will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 , 80A, 80B, and 80C. Based on the connection of playlists, the structure of scripts can be roughly divided into three categories: (1) single playlist, (2) continuous playlist, (3) multiple playlists as shown in FIG. 79 .
分类为(1)的单个播放列表是图80A所示的一个播放列表组成的脚本。对于单个播放列表,可以确定一个时间线。在脚本的再现过程中没有中断。当单个播放列表的内容是影片时,在装入光盘后,只再现影片的主要部分。A single playlist classified as (1) is a script composed of one playlist shown in FIG. 80A. For a single playlist, a timeline can be determined. There is no interruption during the reproduction of the script. When the content of a single playlist is a movie, only the main part of the movie is reproduced after the disc is loaded.
分类为(2)的连续列表是由多个播放列表组成的脚本,上述多个播放列表如图80B所示,线性地排列,没有分支。上述播放列表的排列方式是一个播放列表的结尾连接到下一个播放列表的开始。在连续播放列表中,可以为每个播放列表确定一个时间线。当连续播放列表的内容是影片时,脚本是由菜单屏幕和影片的主要部分组成。在装入光盘后,执行一个播放列表,其显示一个菜单屏幕。当在菜单屏幕上指定影片的主要部分的再现时,执行下一个播放列表,并且再现影片的主要内容。A continuous list classified as (2) is a scenario composed of a plurality of playlists arranged linearly without branching as shown in FIG. 80B . The above playlists are arranged in such a way that the end of one playlist is connected to the beginning of the next playlist. In continuous playlists, a timeline can be defined for each playlist. When the content of the continuous playlist is a movie, the scenario is composed of the menu screen and the main part of the movie. After the disc is loaded, a playlist is executed, which displays a menu screen. When the reproduction of the main part of the movie is designated on the menu screen, the next playlist is executed, and the main content of the movie is reproduced.
分类为(3)的多个播放列表是一个具有连接处的脚本,该连接处是播放列表的分支或组合。在多个播放列表中,不能通过所有播放列表确定一个时间线,而是在每个播放列表中确定一个时间线。有了多个播放列表,可以实现根据用户的输入改变再现内容的交互功能和游戏功能。当多个播放列表的内容是影片时,可以实现多角度功能,其允许用户在为同一个场景拍摄的不同角度中选择想要的角度。A plurality of playlists classified as (3) is a scenario with a junction which is a branch or combination of playlists. In multiple playlists, one timeline cannot be determined through all playlists, but one timeline is determined in each playlist. With a plurality of playlists, an interactive function and a game function of changing reproduced content according to user's input can be realized. When the contents of multiple playlists are movies, a multi-angle function can be implemented, which allows the user to select a desired angle among different angles shot for the same scene.
如下将描述,为目录BDMV确定一个脚本。然而,有必要允许用户在更小的单元中识别脚本。然而,播放列表的单元并不总是与用户可以识别的单元一致。当播放列表描述三个影片时,有必要允许看到每个影片的搜索点。搜索点(进入点)是与播放列表的结构独立的,这将在后面作为标题和/或章节描述。As will be described below, a script is determined for the directory BDMV. However, it is necessary to allow users to recognize scripts in smaller units. However, the units of the playlist do not always coincide with the units recognizable by the user. When a playlist describes three titles, it is necessary to allow the seek point for each title to be seen. The search point (entry point) is independent of the structure of the playlist, which will be described later as title and/or chapter.
接下来,参照图81,描述标题和章节。标题表示脚本中的任何再现开始点。在图81所示的例子中,标题1位于播放列表470A的开始。标题2位于播放列表470D的中间。播放列表470A的开始之后到标题2的区域是标题1。章节是标题再次划分的单元。还可以认为章节是再现开始点。标题1再划分成章节。在图81所示的例子中,标题1有章节1、2和3。因而,标题1划分成了三部分。如图81所示,每个标题和章节可以位于播放列表的中部。Next, referring to FIG. 81 , titles and chapters are described. A title represents any reproduction starting point in a script. In the example shown in FIG. 81,
3-3.关于虚拟播放器模型3-3. About the virtual player model
根据本发明第二模式,脚本描述语言所描述的脚本可以由图27所示的根据本发明第一模式的BD虚拟播放器模型再现。在光盘装入BD虚拟播放器30之后,它将脚本当作PBC程序40,并且根据脚本的描述操作,该脚本是由根据本发明第二模式的最初确定的脚本描述语言所描述的。根据一个事件控制BD虚拟播放器30,该事件当操作BD虚拟操作器30时发生。According to the second mode of the present invention, the script described in the script description language can be reproduced by the BD virtual player model according to the first mode of the present invention shown in FIG. 27 . After the disc is loaded into the BD
脚本具有用于命令的两个区域,包括具有命令的一个程序,其操作播放器。上述两个区域称为整体命令区域和局部命令区域。The script has two areas for commands, including a program with commands, which operate the player. The above two areas are called the overall command area and the local command area.
整体命令区域具有整体命令,该命令是对整个脚本有效的。例如,整体程序描述了一个程序,其当光盘装入播放器时使得播放器初始化参数,并且跳跃到组成菜单屏幕的一个播放列表。局部命令区域描述了播放列表的程序。在本发明的第二模式中,局部命令分成四类,它们是前置命令、项目再现命令、后置命令、按键命令(pre_commands、play item commands、postcommands和button commands)。The global command area has global commands, which are valid for the entire script. For example, the overall program describes a program that causes the player to initialize parameters when a disc is loaded into the player, and to jump to a playlist constituting the menu screen. The local command area describes the program of the playlist. In the second mode of the present invention, partial commands are divided into four categories, which are pre-commands, item reproduction commands, post-commands, and key commands (pre_commands, play item commands, postcommands, and button commands).
图82A和图82B示出了BD虚拟播放器30的操作,该操作相应于根据本发明第二模式描述为脚本的命令。图82A示出了BD虚拟播放器30的光盘装入操作的一个例子。如上所述,为目录BDMV创建一个脚本。当光盘装入播放器并且为光盘执行初始的访问时(在步骤S30),初始化寄存器,也就是公用参数32(在步骤S31)。在下一个步骤S32,从光盘中读出程序并执行。首次访问表示当光盘装入播放器时,首次再现光盘的操作,例如访问初始化。82A and 82B show operations of the BD
当光盘装入播放器时初始化读出并执行的命令组(程序)称为整体命令。该整体命令描述例如广告画面(预告片)和一个跳跃命令,其跳跃到组成菜单屏幕的一个播放列表。播放器根据上述命令再现播放列表。A command group (program) that is initially read out and executed when a disc is loaded into a player is called an overall command. The overall command describes, for example, an advertisement screen (trailer) and a jump command which jumps to a playlist constituting the menu screen. The player reproduces the playlist according to the above command.
图82B示出了当播放器是停止状态而用户按下例如再现键时,播放器30的操作。该操作相应于图28中从状态B到状态A的状态改变。在停止状态中(步骤S40中),用户使用例如远程控制器(UOP:用户操作),使播放器30在再现模式中操作。结果,寄存器(也就是公用参数32)被初始化(在步骤S41)。在下一个步骤A42,BD虚拟播放器30进入播放列表再现阶段。Fig. 82B shows the operation of the
接下来,参照图83A和图83B,描述在播放列表阶段中的播放列表的再现。图83A示出了播放列表由单个播放项目组成的例子。播放列表具有前置命令区域,播放项目命令区域和后置命令区域,上述区域描述了各自的命令。在播放列表再现阶段,执行前置命令区域的前置命令(在步骤S10)。在执行了前置命令之后,播放器进入了播放项目的播放项目再现阶段,上述播放项目组成了播放列表(在步骤S11)。在播放项目再现阶段,再现一个流(在步骤S110),上述流的开始点和结束点是由一个播放项目指定的。当上述再现到结束点时,执行播放项目命令(在步骤S111)。在执行了播放项目命令之后,执行后置命令区域的后置命令(在步骤S12)。结果,完成了播放列表的再现。Next, with reference to FIGS. 83A and 83B , reproduction of a playlist in the playlist stage will be described. Fig. 83A shows an example in which a PlayList is composed of a single PlayItem. The playlist has a pre-command area, a playitem command area and a post-command area, which describe the respective commands. In the playlist reproduction stage, the pre-command of the pre-command area is executed (at step S10). After executing the pre-command, the player enters the play item reproduction stage of the play items that make up the play list (at step S11). In the playitem reproduction stage, a stream whose start point and end point are specified by a playitem is reproduced (at step S110). When the above-mentioned reproduction reaches the end point, a playitem command is executed (at step S111). After the PlayItem command is executed, the post command of the post command area is executed (at step S12). As a result, reproduction of the playlist is completed.
后置命令通常是跳跃命令,其描述为一个播放列表要再现的跳跃命令,包括菜单屏幕的播放列表。当没有跳跃命令时,播放器进入停止状态(图28所示的状态B)。The subsequent command is usually a skip command, which is described as a skip command to be reproduced by a playlist, including the playlist of the menu screen. When there is no jump command, the player enters a stop state (state B shown in FIG. 28).
图83B示出了播放列表描述多个播放项目的例子。在这种情况下,播放列表具有一个前置命令区域、播放列表命令区域和后置命令区域,其描述了各个命令。当播放列表描述了多个播放项目时,播放项目命令区域描述了播放项目流和排列在时间序列中的播放项目的播放项目命令。Fig. 83B shows an example in which a PlayList describes a plurality of PlayItems. In this case, the playlist has a pre-command area, playlist command area, and post-command area, which describe each command. When the playlist describes a plurality of playitems, the playitem command area describes a playitem stream and a playitem command of the playitems arranged in time sequence.
当播放列表描述了多个播放项目时,在播放列表再现阶段中,执行前置命令(在步骤S10)。在下一个播放项目再现阶段中,从每个播放项目的开始点和结束点再现一个流,并且为每个播放项目执行一个播放项目命令。在图83B所示的例子中,再现第一播放项目流(在步骤S110-1)。此后,执行相应的播放项目命令(在步骤S111-1)。此后,再现第二播放项目流(未示出)(在步骤S110-2)。执行相应的播放项目命令(在步骤S111-2)。重复这些操作,重复的次数等于播放项目的数量。在再现了最后的播放项目流(在步骤S110-n)并且执行了相应的播放项目命令(在步骤S111-n)之后,结束播放项目再现阶段(在步骤S12)。结果,结束了播放列表再现阶段。When the PlayList describes a plurality of PlayItems, in the PlayList reproduction stage, a pre-command is executed (at step S10). In the next playitem reproduction stage, one stream is reproduced from the start point and end point of each playitem, and one playitem command is executed for each playitem. In the example shown in FIG. 83B, the first play item stream is reproduced (at step S110-1). Thereafter, the corresponding PlayItem command is executed (at step S111-1). Thereafter, a second play item stream (not shown) is reproduced (at step S110-2). The corresponding PlayItem command is executed (at step S111-2). Repeat these operations a number of times equal to the number of play items. After the last playitem stream is reproduced (at step S110-n) and the corresponding playitem command is executed (at step S111-n), the playitem reproduction phase is ended (at step S12). As a result, the playlist reproduction phase ends.
根据本发明的第二模式,可以分级地考虑脚本、播放列表和播放项目,上述脚本、播放列表和播放项目在BD虚拟播放器30上执行。换句话说,如图84A所示,一个脚本版面601位于BD虚拟播放器600之上。具有一个或多个播放列表的播放列表版面602位于脚本版面601之上。播放项目(PI)版面603位于播放列表版面602之上。每个播放列表具有一个或多个播放项目。According to the second mode of the present invention, scenarios, playlists, and playitems which are executed on the BD
在分级结构中,通过脚本版面601由BD虚拟播放器执行播放列表和播放项目。因而,当在脚本中描述用于播放列表的控制命令时,可以容易地实现播放列表的分支等。这同样适用于图84B所示的播放项目。In the hierarchical structure, playlists and playitems are executed by the BD virtual player through the script layout 601 . Thus, when a control command for a playlist is described in the script, branching of the playlist and the like can be easily realized. The same applies to the PlayItem shown in Fig. 84B.
3-4.关于语法3-4. About grammar
接下来,将描述一个根据本发明第二模式的用于存储命令和数据库到光盘的方法,上述数据库描述了一个脚本。在本发明第二模式中,假定在脚本文件“scenario.pbc”中描述数据,该数据是实现BDAV格式的扩展功能所必需的。脚本文件“scenario.pbc”位于文件的管理结构中目录BDAV之下,上述文件记录在图9所示“蓝光光盘可擦写格式版本1.0第三部分”中确定的记录介质上。Next, a method for storing commands and a database describing a script according to the second mode of the present invention will be described on an optical disc. In the second mode of the present invention, it is assumed that data necessary to realize the extended functions of the BDAV format is described in the scenario file "scenario.pbc". The script file "scenario.pbc" is located under the directory BDAV in the file management structure, and the above-mentioned file is recorded on the recording medium specified in "Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format Version 1.0
图86所示的语法描述了脚本文件(scenario.pbc)的结构的例子。文件“scenario.pbc”接连地包含文件标识符符号、版本号、和块开始地址。文件“scenario.pbc”还包括对应于功能的块。文件type_indicator具有32位的数据长度,并且描述了预定的字符串,该字符串表示该文件包含一个脚本。域version_number具有32位的数据长度,并且描述了版本号。域TitleEntry_start_address具有无符号整数的32位的数据长度,并且描述了一个值,该值表示从文件“scenario.pbc”的开始以相关的字节数在块TitleEntry()的开始的位置。类似地,域scenario_start_address具有无符号整数的32位的数据长度,并描述了以一个值在块scenario()的开始的位置,该值表示从文件“scenario.pbc”的开始的相关字节数。The syntax shown in Fig. 86 describes an example of the structure of the scenario file (scenario.pbc). The file "scenario.pbc" successively contains a file identifier symbol, a version number, and a block start address. The file "scenario.pbc" also includes blocks corresponding to functions. The file type_indicator has a data length of 32 bits, and describes a predetermined character string indicating that the file contains a script. A field version_number has a data length of 32 bits, and describes a version number. The field TitleEntry_start_address has a data length of 32 bits of an unsigned integer, and describes a value indicating the position at the start of the block TitleEntry( ) in the relevant number of bytes from the start of the file "scenario.pbc". Similarly, the field scenario_start_address has a data length of 32 bits of an unsigned integer, and describes the position at the start of the block scenario() with a value indicating the relative number of bytes from the start of the file "scenario.pbc".
块GlobalCommand()从一个固定位置开始,从该文件的第41字节开始。块GlobalCommand()描述了一个程序,当播放器初始访问光盘时(也就是,当光盘装入播放器后,播放器最初从光盘再现数据时),执行该程序。整体命令位于块GlobalCommand()中。块GlobalCommand()之后是任意数量的padding_word,以便块之间彼此分离。The block GlobalCommand() starts at a fixed position, starting at
块TitleEntry()描述了脚本中搜索点的列表。为目录BDAV创建一个脚本。脚本确定了位于目录BDAV下的多个播放列表的再现顺序。用户看到的脚本,看上去好象是由多个“标题”组成的,而不是由一个图像/声音单元组成。Block TitleEntry() describes a list of search points in the script. Create a script for directory BDAV. The script determines the reproduction order of a plurality of playlists located under the directory BDAV. The script that the user sees looks as if it is composed of multiple "titles" rather than a single image/sound unit.
当一张光盘包含三个影片时,即使光盘只具有一个确定了影片再现顺序的脚本,用户看到的光盘也将是好象包含三个标题的。可选地,用户看到的光盘好象是分割成四个标题,包括标题菜单屏幕,用户可以使用标题菜单屏幕选择三个标题中的一个。由于用户可以把菜单屏幕看作一个图像/声音单元,根据本发明的第二模式,菜单屏幕可以看作一种标题。When a disc contains three titles, the user sees the disc as if it contains three titles even if the disc has only one script which determines the reproduction order of the films. Alternatively, the user sees the disc as if divided into four titles, including a title menu screen with which the user can select one of three titles. Since the user can regard the menu screen as a picture/sound unit, according to the second mode of the present invention, the menu screen can be regarded as a title.
因此,由于确定播放列表的连接的脚本单元与用户看作图像/声音块的单元不同,需要在脚本中确定搜索点。脚本中的搜索点可以看作标题入口。Therefore, since the script unit that determines the connection of the playlist is different from the unit that the user regards as an image/sound block, it is necessary to determine a search point in the script. Search points in scripts can be thought of as header entries.
块Scenario()描述了一个“脚本”。块Scenario()描述了有关播放列表的再现顺序、每个播放列表的局部命令区域等信息。The block Scenario() describes a "script". The block Scenario( ) describes information about the reproduction order of PlayLists, the local command area of each PlayList, and the like.
图87所示的语法描述了块GlbalCommand()的结构的例子。域length具有32位的数据长度、一个无符号整数,并且描述了从域length的结束到块GlobalCommand()的结束的字节长度。域number_of_commands描述了后面的域command的号码。域command具有32位的数据长度,并且描述了用于播放器的一组参数、用于指定播放列表的再现开始命令、计算命令等。The syntax shown in Fig. 87 describes an example of the structure of block GlbalCommand(). The field length has a data length of 32 bits, an unsigned integer, and describes the byte length from the end of the field length to the end of the block GlobalCommand(). The field number_of_commands describes the number of the following field command. A field command has a data length of 32 bits, and describes a set of parameters for the player, a reproduction start command for specifying a playlist, a calculation command, and the like.
图88所示的语法描述了块TitleEntry()的数据结构的例子。域length具有32位的数据长度、无符号整数,并且描述了从域length的结束到块TitleEntry()的结束的字节长度。域number_of_Titles描述了该域之后for循环描述的标题的搜索点的数量。域Entry_Playlist_file_name描述了包含标题的一个搜索点的播放列表的文件名。域Title_name_character_set描述了表示下一个域Title_name的字符设置。域Title_name描述了指定到搜索点的名字的字符串。The syntax shown in Fig. 88 describes an example of the data structure of the block TitleEntry(). The field length has a data length of 32 bits, an unsigned integer, and describes the byte length from the end of the field length to the end of the block TitleEntry(). The field number_of_Titles describes the number of search points for the titles described by the for loop following this field. The field Entry_Playlist_file_name describes the file name of a playlist containing a title of a seek point. The field Title_name_character_set describes the character set representing the next field Title_name. The field Title_name describes the character string assigned to the name of the search point.
域number_of_Chapters描述了之后在for循环中描述的章节的数量。如上所述,章节是标题的部分。用户可以把章节看作标题。章节用作脚本的搜索点。域Title_number具有16位的数据长度、无符号整数,并且描述了标题号码,其中章节对应于for循环的当前循环计数器值(在下文中,章节称为该章节)。域chapter_entry_Playlist_file_name描述了该章节表示的播放列表的播放列表文件的文件名。域chapter_ref_to_PlayItem_id描述了该章节表示的播放列表项目号。域chapter_time_stamp描述了该章节表示的播放项目的时间。The field number_of_Chapters describes the number of chapters described later in the for loop. As mentioned above, chapters are sections of titles. Users can see chapters as headings. Chapters are used as search points for scripts. The field Title_number has a data length of 16 bits, an unsigned integer, and describes a title number in which a chapter corresponds to a current loop counter value of a for loop (hereinafter, a chapter is referred to as the chapter). The field chapter_entry_Playlist_file_name describes the file name of the playlist file of the playlist indicated by this chapter. The field chapter_ref_to_PlayItem_id describes the playlist item number indicated by this chapter. The field chapter_time_stamp describes the time of the PlayItem indicated by the chapter.
块Title_Menu_Call_PL()描述了当用户使播放器再现光盘的标题时,组成所显示的菜单的播放列表。用户通过按下远程命令器上的例如标题菜单键指定一个标题,该远程命令器远程地操作播放器。每个脚本具有一个标题菜单,用户可以使用该标题菜单看到标题的搜索点。当用户使用例如远程命令器,选择标题菜单上他或她想要的标题时,播放器从标题入口列表得到一个播放列表,该标题入口列表对应于从域number_of_Title之后的for循环中描述的信息,并开始再现该播放列表。The block Title_Menu_Call_PL( ) describes the playlist that makes up the displayed menu when the user causes the player to reproduce the title of the optical disc. The user designates a title by pressing, for example, a title menu key on a remote commander that remotely operates the player. Each script has a title menu that the user can use to see the title's search point. When the user selects his or her desired title on the title menu using, for example, a remote commander, the player gets a playlist from the title entry list corresponding to the information described in the for loop after the field number_of_Title, and start reproducing the playlist.
在块Title_Menu_Call_PL()中,域标记描述了关于标题菜单的属性信息。域TitleMenu_entry_PlayList_name描述了组成标题菜单的播放列表,或播放列表组的进入点的播放列表。域TitleMenu_ref_to_PlayItem_id描述了一个播放项目播放项目号,该播放项目是一个播放列表的起始。当从开始再现一个播放列表时,域TitleMenu_ref_to_PlayItem_id的值是[0]。In the block Title_Menu_Call_PL(), field tags describe attribute information about the title menu. The field TitleMenu_entry_PlayList_name describes a playlist constituting a title menu, or a playlist of an entry point of a playlist group. The field TitleMenu_ref_to_PlayItem_id describes a PlayItem number of a PlayItem which is the start of a PlayList. When reproducing a PlayList from the beginning, the value of the field TitleMenu_ref_to_PlayItem_id is [0].
域TitleMenu_chapter_time_stamp描述了播放项目的时间。当从开始再现一个播放项目时,域TitleMenu_chapter_time_stamp描述了播放项目的开始时间。域UOP_mask_table()描述了用户被限制的有关操作的信息。当用户执行一个域UOP_mask_table()中描述的操作时,播放器不响应用户的操作。当用户被禁止执行快速向前操作时,在域UOP_mask_table()中描述被禁止的用户操作。The field TitleMenu_chapter_time_stamp describes the time when the item was played. The field TitleMenu_chapter_time_stamp describes the start time of a PlayItem when a PlayItem is reproduced from the beginning. The field UOP_mask_table() describes the information about which operations the user is restricted from. When the user performs an operation described in a field UOP_mask_table(), the player does not respond to the user's operation. When a user is prohibited from performing a fast forward operation, the prohibited user operation is described in the field UOP_mask_table().
图89所示的语法描述了块scenario()的结构的一个例子。块scenario()描述了有关脚本,也就是播放列表链接的信息。域length描述了从该域的结束到块scenario()的结尾的字节长度。域number_of_Playlist描述了组成一个脚本的播放列表的数量。域number_of_Playlist之后是for循环。在for循环中,描述有关播放列表的信息(播放列表称为该播放列表),该播放列表是对应于for循环的一个循环计数器的。The syntax shown in Fig. 89 describes an example of the structure of block scenario(). The block scenario() describes information about the script, that is, the link to the playlist. The field length describes the length in bytes from the end of the field to the end of the block scenario(). The field number_of_Playlist describes the number of playlists constituting one scenario. After the field number_of_Playlist is a for loop. In the for loop, describe information about the playlist (the playlist is called the playlist), which is a loop counter corresponding to the for loop.
for循环之后是该播放列表的数据。域flags描述了播放列表的属性信息。由于域flags描述的数据与本发明的第二模式不直接相关,将省略对其的描述。域PL_UOP_mask_table()描述了在每个播放列表中用户受到限制的操作。当再现上述播放列表时,只能执行在命令UOP_mask_table()(将在后面描述)和域PL_UOP_mask_table()中都允许的用户操作。然而,最终确定是否可以执行用户的操作,是根据块PL_UOP_mask_table()中描述的数据,这将与上述命令和域一起在下面描述。After the for loop is the data of the playlist. The field flags describes the attribute information of the playlist. Since the data described by the field flags is not directly related to the second mode of the present invention, description thereof will be omitted. The field PL_UOP_mask_table( ) describes the user restricted operations in each playlist. When the above PlayList is reproduced, only user operations allowed in both the command UOP_mask_table() (to be described later) and the field PL_UOP_mask_table() can be performed. However, the final determination of whether the user's operation can be performed is based on the data described in the block PL_UOP_mask_table(), which will be described below together with the above commands and fields.
域Parental_level描述了限制观赏播放列表的观众的必要信息。该信息描述了可以观赏该播放列表的观众的年龄和年龄群。The field Parental_level describes necessary information to restrict viewers viewing the playlist. This information describes the age and age group of viewers who can view the playlist.
域number_of_Pre_Commands描述了命令(前置命令)的数量,该命令组成了在再现该播放列表前执行的一个程序。在域PL_Command(i)中描述该程序。域number_of_Post_Commands描述了命令的数量,该命令组成了在再现该播放列表前执行的程序(前置命令)。在域PL_Command(i)中描述一个程序。域Pre_Commands_Start_id描述了在再现播放列表之前在命令表格中执行的程序的开始号码。该号码对应于域PL_Command(i)的参数i。域Post_Commnads_Start_id描述了一个程序的开始号码,在再现了播放列表之后,该程序在命令表格中执行。该号码对应于域PL_Command(i)的参数i。The field number_of_Pre_Commands describes the number of commands (pre-commands) constituting a program executed before reproducing the PlayList. The program is described in the field PL_Command(i). The field number_of_Post_Commands describes the number of commands constituting the program (pre-commands) executed before reproducing the PlayList. A program is described in the field PL_Command(i). The field Pre_Commands_Start_id describes the start number of the program executed in the command table before reproducing the PlayList. This number corresponds to parameter i of field PL_Command(i). The field Post_Commnads_Start_id describes the start number of a program which is executed in the command table after the playlist is reproduced. This number corresponds to parameter i of field PL_Command(i).
域number_of_PlayItems描述了组成该播放列表的播放项目的数量。域PL_UOP_mask_table()描述了在每个播放项目中,对用户操作限制的有关信息。当再现播放项目时,只能执行在三种类型的表格中允许的用户操作,它们是命令UOP_mask_table()(将在后面描述)、命令PL_UOP_mask_table()和域PL_UOP_mask_table()。The field number_of_PlayItems describes the number of PlayItems constituting the PlayList. The field PL_UOP_mask_table( ) describes information about restrictions on user operations in each PlayItem. When reproducing a PlayItem, only user operations allowed in three types of tables, command UOP_mask_table() (to be described later), command PL_UOP_mask_table(), and field PL_UOP_mask_table(), can be performed.
域PI_Commands_Start_id描述了播放项目再现之后,在命令表格中执行的命令的开始号码。该号码表示域PL_Command(i)中的参数i。域number_of_PL_Commands描述了由后面的for循环表示的命令表格中的命令的数量。包含在域PL_Command(i)中的命令由号码i连续指定。域PL_Command(i)描述了一个命令。号码i由域Pre_Commands_start_id、域Post_Commands_start_id、域PL_Commands_start_id等指示。The field PI_Commands_Start_id describes the start number of the command executed in the command table after PlayItem reproduction. This number represents parameter i in field PL_Command(i). The field number_of_PL_Commands describes the number of commands in the command table represented by the following for loop. The commands contained in the field PL_Command(i) are consecutively designated by the number i. The field PL_Command(i) describes a command. The number i is indicated by a field Pre_Commands_start_id, a field Post_Commands_start_id, a field PL_Commands_start_id, and so on.
3-5.有关命令3-5. Related commands
图90示出了根据本发明第二模式的脚本中使用的命令的例子。上述命令是BD虚拟播放器300具有的方法。然而,应当注意图90所示的命令是根据本发明第二方面的模式中的脚本中一部分使用的命令。实际上,可以确定更多命令,以便实现根据本发明第一模式的用户界面的多种功能。例如,可以进一步确定用于再现声音数据的命令和用于显示按键的命令。Fig. 90 shows an example of commands used in the script according to the second mode of the present invention. The above command is a method that the BD
接下来,将描述用于指定再现开始位置的方法。方法LinkPlayList(PlayListNumber)开始再现由“PlayListNumber”指定的一个播放列表。方法LinkPlayItem(PlayListNumber,PlayItemNumber)开始再现由播放列表指定的播放项目。“PlayListNumber”是其值从“0”开始的“PlayItem_id”。当“PlayItemNumber”的值指定为“0”时,从开始再现该播放项目所属的播放列表。Next, a method for specifying a reproduction start position will be described. The method LinkPlayList(PlayListNumber) starts reproduction of a playlist specified by "PlayListNumber". The method LinkPlayItem(PlayListNumber, PlayItemNumber) starts reproduction of the play item specified by the play list. "PlayListNumber" is "PlayItem_id" whose value starts from "0". When the value of "PlayItemNumber" is specified as "0", the PlayList to which the PlayItem belongs is played back from the beginning.
方法Link(position)(object)在脚本中从当前位置跳到前面或后面的播放列表、播放项目或章节。参数“position”描述了“prev”、“next”、“top”、“parent”和“tail”中的一个。参数“object”描述了用于一个对象(播放列表、播放项目或章节)的跳跃方法。The method Link(position)(object) jumps from the current position to the previous or subsequent playlist, playitem or chapter in the script. The parameter "position" describes one of "prev", "next", "top", "parent" and "tail". The parameter "object" describes the jump method for an object (playlist, playitem or chapter).
方法Exit停止了脚本的再现。在这种情况下,不保持标准寄存器的值。方法RSM访问存储在播放器的存储器中的重新开始信息、将该重新开始信息设置到寄存器,并再现脚本。The method Exit stops the reproduction of the script. In this case, the value of the standard register is not maintained. The method RSM accesses the resume information stored in the memory of the player, sets the resume information to a register, and reproduces the scenario.
接下来,将描述用于得到播放器的状态的方法。方法getMenuDescriptionLanguage()得到显示菜单的语言。方法getScenarioNumber()和方法getChapterNumber()分别得到正在再现的脚本号、播放列表号和章节号。方法getPlayerSupport()得到播放器的版本信息。Next, a method for obtaining the status of the player will be described. The method getMenuDescriptionLanguage() gets the language of the displayed menu. The method getScenarioNumber( ) and method getChapterNumber( ) respectively obtain the scenario number, playlist number and chapter number being reproduced. The method getPlayerSupport() gets the version information of the player.
接下来,将描述用于视频流的方法。方法getVideoStreamAvailability()得到一个信息,该信息表示是否包含一个指定的视频流。方法setVideoStreamNumber()得到已选择的视频流的号码。方法getVideoStreamAttr()得到已选择的视频流的属性。该属性是例如视频流的解码系统、分辨率、纵横比、纵横比是4∶3时的显示模式以及关闭字幕出现/不出现。方法setAngleNumber()描述一个角度数字。方法getAngleNumber()得到已选择的一个角度数字。方法getMaxVideoStream()得到视频流的最大数量。Next, a method for video streaming will be described. The method getVideoStreamAvailability() gets an information indicating whether a specified video stream is included. The method setVideoStreamNumber() gets the number of the selected video stream. The method getVideoStreamAttr() gets the attributes of the selected video stream. The attributes are, for example, the decoding system of the video stream, the resolution, the aspect ratio, the display mode when the aspect ratio is 4:3, and closed caption presence/absence. The method setAngleNumber() describes an angle number. The method getAngleNumber() gets a selected angle number. The method getMaxVideoStream() gets the maximum number of video streams.
要根据脚本文件“scenario.pbc”从光盘中再现内容数据,向图39、图74和图75所示的根据第一模式的播放器解码器100、100′、100″的多介质引擎106添加一个引擎,该引擎根据第二模式分析脚本描述语言。To reproduce content data from an optical disc according to the script file "scenario.pbc", add the An engine that parses the script description language according to the second schema.
当光盘装入图74所示的播放器解码器100′的驱动装置(未示出)时,首先,再现脚本文件“scenario.pbc”。再现的脚本文件“scenario.pbc”作为一个存储对象从输入端101输入到播放器解码器101′。脚本文件“scenario.pbc”通过开关电路102提供给码缓冲器104。脚本文件“scenario.pbc”分析多介质引擎106的引擎。根据分析结果读出脚本数据。从播放列表文件和一个脚本文件读出的显示在影片画面10上的影片数据、显示在字幕平面11和图形平面12(或图形平面12′)上的图像数据、另一个脚本文件、声音数据等,都从光盘中读出来。When the disc is loaded into the drive device (not shown) of the player decoder 100' shown in FIG. 74, first, the scenario file "scenario.pbc" is reproduced. The reproduced scenario file "scenario.pbc" is input from the
4.其它4. Other
在上述例子中,声音数据的第一、第二和第三存储方法应用于本发明的第一模式。然而,声音数据的第一、第二和第三存储方法应用于本发明的第二模式。In the above example, the first, second and third storage methods of sound data are applied to the first mode of the present invention. However, the first, second and third storage methods of sound data are applied to the second mode of the present invention.
在上述例子中,本发明应用于蓝光光盘。然而,本发明可以其它系统的大容量盘型记录介质。In the above example, the present invention is applied to Blu-ray discs. However, the present invention is applicable to large-capacity disc-type recording media of other systems.
虽然参照最佳实施例示出并描述了本发明,本领域技术人员可以理解,在不背离本发明的精神和范围的情况下,可以对其形式和细节进行上述和其它多种改变、省略、添加。Although the present invention has been shown and described with reference to preferred embodiments, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that the above and other various changes, omissions, and additions may be made in the form and details thereof without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. .
Claims (13)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2004021886A JP4715094B2 (en) | 2003-01-30 | 2004-01-29 | REPRODUCTION DEVICE, REPRODUCTION METHOD, REPRODUCTION PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM |
| JP021886/04 | 2004-01-29 |
Publications (2)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CN1700329A CN1700329A (en) | 2005-11-23 |
| CN1700329B true CN1700329B (en) | 2010-06-16 |
Family
ID=34905380
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN2005100717231A Expired - Lifetime CN1700329B (en) | 2004-01-29 | 2005-01-28 | Reproducing device, reproducing method, reproducing program and recording medium |
Country Status (3)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| US (1) | US8620140B2 (en) |
| KR (1) | KR101089974B1 (en) |
| CN (1) | CN1700329B (en) |
Families Citing this family (38)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US6808709B1 (en) * | 1994-12-30 | 2004-10-26 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Immunoglobulins containing protection proteins and their use |
| JP3716920B2 (en) * | 2001-10-16 | 2005-11-16 | ソニー株式会社 | Recording medium reproducing apparatus and method, recording medium, and program |
| RU2330334C2 (en) * | 2002-09-05 | 2008-07-27 | Эл Джи Электроникс Инк. | Recording medium with data structure for playing back recorded static images and recording and playback methods and devices |
| CN100495558C (en) * | 2002-09-06 | 2009-06-03 | Lg电子株式会社 | Methdo and device for recording and reproducing data structure for managing still images |
| WO2004023479A1 (en) * | 2002-09-07 | 2004-03-18 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Recording medium having data structure for managing reproduction of still images from a clip file recorded thereon and recording and reproducing methods and apparatuses |
| RU2334285C2 (en) * | 2002-11-20 | 2008-09-20 | Эл Джи Электроникс Инк. | Recording medium with data structure for managing playback of data recorded on it and methods and devices for recording and playback |
| WO2004049710A1 (en) | 2002-11-28 | 2004-06-10 | Sony Corporation | Reproduction device, reproduction method, reproduction program, and recording medium |
| DE602004023815D1 (en) * | 2003-01-20 | 2009-12-10 | Lg Electronics Inc | RECORDING MEDIUM WITH A DATA STRUCTURE FOR MANAGING THE REPRODUCTION OF STILL IMAGES RECORDED AND RECORDING AND REPRODUCTION METHOD AND DEVICE |
| EP1593121A4 (en) * | 2003-01-20 | 2009-09-30 | Lg Electronics Inc | RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING A DATA STRUCTURE FOR REPRODUCING REPRODUCED IMAGES, AND METHODS AND DEVICES FOR RECORDING AND REPRODUCING. |
| US8145033B2 (en) * | 2003-02-05 | 2012-03-27 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Recording medium having data structure for managing reproducton duration of still pictures recorded thereon and recording and reproducing methods and apparatuses |
| US7734154B2 (en) * | 2003-02-14 | 2010-06-08 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Recording medium having data structure for managing reproduction duration of still pictures recorded thereon and recording and reproducing methods and apparatuses |
| US8055117B2 (en) | 2003-02-15 | 2011-11-08 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Recording medium having data structure for managing reproduction duration of still pictures recorded thereon and recording and reproducing methods and apparatuses |
| US8041179B2 (en) * | 2003-02-24 | 2011-10-18 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Methods and apparatuses for reproducing and recording still picture and audio data and recording medium having data structure for managing reproduction of still picture and audio data |
| EP1713269B1 (en) | 2004-01-13 | 2012-08-08 | Panasonic Corporation | Recording medium, reproduction device, recording method, program, and reproduction method |
| US7660516B2 (en) | 2004-02-17 | 2010-02-09 | Panasonic Corporation | Recording medium, reproduction device, program, and reproduction method |
| KR101162790B1 (en) * | 2004-07-06 | 2012-07-05 | 파나소닉 주식회사 | Optical device, reproduction device, reproduction method and recording method |
| US7609947B2 (en) * | 2004-09-10 | 2009-10-27 | Panasonic Corporation | Method and apparatus for coordinating playback from multiple video sources |
| US20060218251A1 (en) * | 2005-03-14 | 2006-09-28 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | AV server, AV contents reproducing apparatus, AV contents transmitting method, program and recording medium |
| CN102867530B (en) * | 2005-07-14 | 2016-01-06 | 汤姆森许可贸易公司 | For providing the method and apparatus of the auxiliary media in digital cinema composition playlist |
| US20100284667A1 (en) * | 2005-07-27 | 2010-11-11 | Hiroshi Yahata | Information recording medium, recording device, and recording method |
| JP2007142785A (en) * | 2005-11-18 | 2007-06-07 | Hitachi Ltd | Recording / playback device |
| MY143840A (en) * | 2005-11-29 | 2011-07-15 | Pioneer Corp | Information reproducing apparatus and method, and computer program |
| GB2432987A (en) * | 2005-12-05 | 2007-06-06 | Ant Software Ltd | Outputting additional video material during fast-forward, rewind or pause operations of a video player |
| JP2007258873A (en) * | 2006-03-22 | 2007-10-04 | Toshiba Corp | Playback apparatus and playback method |
| KR101100212B1 (en) * | 2006-04-21 | 2011-12-28 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Broadcast signal transmission method, broadcast signal reproduction method, broadcast signal transmission device and broadcast signal reception device |
| JP4492588B2 (en) * | 2006-06-13 | 2010-06-30 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Data display method, playback device, and recording device |
| JP4901389B2 (en) * | 2006-09-20 | 2012-03-21 | 株式会社東芝 | Video server and material output method |
| JP4901390B2 (en) * | 2006-09-20 | 2012-03-21 | 株式会社東芝 | Video server and material output method |
| JP4775208B2 (en) * | 2006-09-21 | 2011-09-21 | ソニー株式会社 | REPRODUCTION METHOD, REPRODUCTION PROGRAM, AND REPRODUCTION DEVICE |
| EP2445224B1 (en) * | 2009-06-17 | 2017-05-03 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Management Co., Ltd. | Information recording medium for reproducing 3d video, and reproduction device |
| JP5452597B2 (en) * | 2009-07-17 | 2014-03-26 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Operation screen display device, air conditioning system, and program |
| US8717374B2 (en) * | 2010-09-13 | 2014-05-06 | Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. | Methods and apparatus to display process control information |
| US8942543B1 (en) * | 2010-10-06 | 2015-01-27 | Verint Video Solutions Inc. | Systems, methods, and software for improved video data recovery effectiveness |
| JP5671949B2 (en) * | 2010-11-04 | 2015-02-18 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information recording medium, and information processing method |
| WO2012127787A1 (en) | 2011-03-22 | 2012-09-27 | パナソニック株式会社 | Disk playback apparatus |
| US20140320592A1 (en) * | 2013-04-30 | 2014-10-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Virtual Video Camera |
| JP6445933B2 (en) * | 2014-08-06 | 2018-12-26 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | Recording medium, reproducing apparatus and method thereof |
| CN109002168B (en) * | 2018-08-08 | 2021-02-19 | 尹彦勇 | Picture information conversion method and system |
Citations (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN1269049A (en) * | 1998-03-19 | 2000-10-04 | 皇家菲利浦电子有限公司 | Recording/reproduction and/or editing of real time information on/from a disc like record carrier |
Family Cites Families (16)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US5187500A (en) * | 1990-09-05 | 1993-02-16 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Control of energy to thermal inkjet heating elements |
| JPH07274140A (en) | 1994-03-31 | 1995-10-20 | Toshiba Corp | Television receiver |
| JPH08339663A (en) | 1995-04-14 | 1996-12-24 | Toshiba Corp | Recording medium, recording apparatus for recording data on the recording medium, and recording method thereof, reproducing apparatus for reproducing data from the recording medium, and reproducing method |
| EP0827336B1 (en) * | 1996-08-30 | 2003-10-15 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Digital broadcasting system, digital broadcasting apparatus, and associated receiver therefor |
| JPH10145722A (en) | 1996-11-07 | 1998-05-29 | Sony Corp | Reproducing control data generation device and method therefor |
| JP4416846B2 (en) | 1997-08-22 | 2010-02-17 | ソニー株式会社 | Computer-readable recording medium recording menu control data, and menu control method and apparatus |
| US7289723B2 (en) * | 1997-12-12 | 2007-10-30 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Digital recording system using variable recording rate |
| US7222309B2 (en) * | 1999-06-02 | 2007-05-22 | Earthlink, Inc. | System and method of a web browser with integrated features and controls |
| JP2001275089A (en) | 2000-03-27 | 2001-10-05 | Toshiba Corp | Digital video recording medium and digital video disk reproducing apparatus |
| KR100771264B1 (en) | 2001-05-12 | 2007-10-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Recorded media including script files, apparatus and method for reproducing the same |
| JP2003219365A (en) | 2002-01-18 | 2003-07-31 | Pioneer Electronic Corp | Information recording medium, information recording apparatus and method, information reproducing apparatus and method, information recording and reproducing apparatus and method, computer program for recording or reproduction control, and data structure including control signal |
| JP3948979B2 (en) | 2002-02-18 | 2007-07-25 | パイオニア株式会社 | Information recording medium, information recording apparatus and method, information reproducing apparatus and method, information recording / reproducing apparatus and method, computer program for recording or reproduction control, and data structure including control signal |
| CN101510982B (en) * | 2003-01-31 | 2010-12-29 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Recording medium, reproduction apparatus, recording method, and reproduction method |
| US8064753B2 (en) * | 2003-03-05 | 2011-11-22 | Freeman Alan D | Multi-feature media article and method for manufacture of same |
| US7307667B1 (en) * | 2003-06-27 | 2007-12-11 | Zoran Corporation | Method and apparatus for an integrated high definition television controller |
| US7725010B2 (en) * | 2004-08-17 | 2010-05-25 | Lg Electronics, Inc. | Method and apparatus of reproducing data recorded on recording medium and local storage |
-
2005
- 2005-01-28 US US11/045,431 patent/US8620140B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2005-01-28 CN CN2005100717231A patent/CN1700329B/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2005-01-28 KR KR1020050008084A patent/KR101089974B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
Patent Citations (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN1269049A (en) * | 1998-03-19 | 2000-10-04 | 皇家菲利浦电子有限公司 | Recording/reproduction and/or editing of real time information on/from a disc like record carrier |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| US8620140B2 (en) | 2013-12-31 |
| KR101089974B1 (en) | 2011-12-05 |
| KR20050077798A (en) | 2005-08-03 |
| US20050196143A1 (en) | 2005-09-08 |
| CN1700329A (en) | 2005-11-23 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CN1700329B (en) | Reproducing device, reproducing method, reproducing program and recording medium | |
| CN100466713C (en) | Reproducing apparatus and reproducing method | |
| JP4715094B2 (en) | REPRODUCTION DEVICE, REPRODUCTION METHOD, REPRODUCTION PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM | |
| CN100459689C (en) | Reproduction device and reproduction method | |
| JP2006230001A (en) | REPRODUCTION DEVICE, REPRODUCTION METHOD, REPRODUCTION PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM | |
| JP5209516B2 (en) | recoding media | |
| JP5209513B2 (en) | recoding media | |
| JP2011097614A (en) | Reproduction device, reproduction method, recording device, recording method, and recording medium | |
| JP2009135946A (en) | Recording medium | |
| JP4277863B2 (en) | REPRODUCTION DEVICE, REPRODUCTION METHOD, REPRODUCTION PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM | |
| JP4277865B2 (en) | REPRODUCTION DEVICE, REPRODUCTION METHOD, REPRODUCTION PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM | |
| JP4277862B2 (en) | REPRODUCTION DEVICE, REPRODUCTION METHOD, REPRODUCTION PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM | |
| JP4277864B2 (en) | REPRODUCTION DEVICE, REPRODUCTION METHOD, REPRODUCTION PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM | |
| JP5187452B2 (en) | Data storage method | |
| JP5494780B2 (en) | data structure | |
| JP5187451B2 (en) | Data storage method | |
| JP5494779B2 (en) | data structure | |
| JP5494781B2 (en) | data structure | |
| JP5209514B2 (en) | recoding media | |
| JP5187454B2 (en) | Data storage method | |
| JP2013051724A (en) | Data storage method |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| C06 | Publication | ||
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| C10 | Entry into substantive examination | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
| C14 | Grant of patent or utility model | ||
| GR01 | Patent grant | ||
| C56 | Change in the name or address of the patentee | ||
| CP01 | Change in the name or title of a patent holder |
Address after: Tokyo, Japan Patentee after: Sony Corp. Address before: Tokyo, Japan Patentee before: Sony Corp. |
|
| EE01 | Entry into force of recordation of patent licensing contract |
Application publication date: 20051123 Assignee: TONLY ELECTRONICS HOLDINGS Ltd. Assignor: Blue light United Co.,Ltd. Contract record no.: 2014990000240 Denomination of invention: Reproducing apparatus, reproducing method, reproducing program, and recording medium Granted publication date: 20100616 License type: Common License Record date: 20140423 Application publication date: 20051123 Assignee: Shenzhen Maxmade Technology Co.,Ltd. Assignor: Blue light United Co.,Ltd. Contract record no.: 2014990000239 Denomination of invention: Reproducing apparatus, reproducing method, reproducing program, and recording medium Granted publication date: 20100616 License type: Common License Record date: 20140423 Application publication date: 20051123 Assignee: CHINA HUALU GROUP Co.,Ltd. Assignor: Blue light United Co.,Ltd. Contract record no.: 2014990000238 Denomination of invention: Reproducing apparatus, reproducing method, reproducing program, and recording medium Granted publication date: 20100616 License type: Common License Record date: 20140423 Application publication date: 20051123 Assignee: GUANGDONG OPPO MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS Corp.,Ltd. Assignor: Blue light United Co.,Ltd. Contract record no.: 2014990000237 Denomination of invention: Reproducing apparatus, reproducing method, reproducing program, and recording medium Granted publication date: 20100616 License type: Common License Record date: 20140423 Application publication date: 20051123 Assignee: GUANGZHOU PANYU JUDA CAR AUDIO EQUIPMENT Co.,Ltd. Assignor: Blue light United Co.,Ltd. Contract record no.: 2014990000233 Denomination of invention: Reproducing apparatus, reproducing method, reproducing program, and recording medium Granted publication date: 20100616 License type: Common License Record date: 20140422 |
|
| LICC | Enforcement, change and cancellation of record of contracts on the licence for exploitation of a patent or utility model | ||
| EE01 | Entry into force of recordation of patent licensing contract |
Application publication date: 20051123 Assignee: Dongguan de video technology Co.,Ltd. Kit Assignor: Blue light United Co.,Ltd. Contract record no.: 2016990000233 Denomination of invention: Reproducing apparatus, reproducing method, reproducing program, and recording medium Granted publication date: 20100616 License type: Common License Record date: 20160614 |
|
| LICC | Enforcement, change and cancellation of record of contracts on the licence for exploitation of a patent or utility model | ||
| EE01 | Entry into force of recordation of patent licensing contract |
Application publication date: 20051123 Assignee: Shanghai Epic Music Co.,Ltd. Assignor: Blue light United Co.,Ltd. Contract record no.: 2016990000555 Denomination of invention: Reproducing apparatus, reproducing method, reproducing program, and recording medium Granted publication date: 20100616 License type: Common License Record date: 20161228 |
|
| LICC | Enforcement, change and cancellation of record of contracts on the licence for exploitation of a patent or utility model | ||
| CX01 | Expiry of patent term | ||
| CX01 | Expiry of patent term |
Granted publication date: 20100616 |